Agilent Technologies N5230C Technical data

Service Guide
N5230C
Agilent Technologies
4-Port PNA-L
Microwave Network Analyzers
(300 kHz–13.5 GHz)
(300 kHz–20 GHz)
Part Number N5230-90025
Printed in USA
January 15, 2014
Supersedes: October 1, 2013
 Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2008-2014
Warranty Statement
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING
CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, AGILENT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
AGILENT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, USE, OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY
INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. SHOULD AGILENT AND THE USER HAVE A SEPARATE WRITTEN
AGREEMENT WITH WARRANTY TERMS COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT
WITH THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY TERMS IN THE SEPARATE AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL.
DFARS/Restricted Rights Notice
If software is for use in the performance of a U.S. Government prime contract or subcontract, Software is
delivered and licensed as “Commercial computer software” as defined in DFAR 252.227-7014 (June 1995),
or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in
FAR 52.227-19 (June 1987) or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause. Use, duplication or
disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies’ standard commercial license terms, and non-DOD
Departments and Agencies of the U.S. Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined
in FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June 1987). U.S. Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as
defined in FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987) or DFAR 252.227-7015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as applicable in any
technical data.
Certification
Agilent Technologies, Inc. certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment
from the factory. Agilent Technologies, Inc. further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable
to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's
calibration facility, and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
ii
Service Guide N5230-90025
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent
Technologies, Inc. products. For information about these agreements and for other assistance, contact
Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Safety and Regulatory Information
The safety and regulatory information pertaining to this product is located in Chapter 1, “Safety and
Regulatory Information.”
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each of the notes and
its meaning before operating this instrument. All pertinent safety notes for using this product are located in
Chapter 1, “Safety and Regulatory Information.”
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a
warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed
beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Documentation Map
The online Help files are embedded in the analyzer, offering quick reference to
programming and user documentation. From the Help drop-down menu, you can
access the Help system in five different languages. Also, you can view the Analyzer
Product Overview multimedia presentation and access the analyzer’s Web page.
Service Guide N5230-90025
iii
The Installation and Quick Start Guide helps you to quickly familiarize yourself with
the analyzer. Procedures are provided for installing, configuring, and verifying the
operation of the analyzer.
Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web
To print copies of documentation from the Web, download the PDF file from the Agilent web site:
•
Go to www.agilent.com.
•
Enter the product model number in the search function and click Search.
•
Click on the Manuals hyperlink.
iv
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents
1
Safety and Regulatory Information
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Chapter One at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
General Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Safety Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Before Applying Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Electrostatic Discharge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Instrument Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Lithium Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2
General Product Information
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Chapter Two at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Physical Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Electrical Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Analyzer Options Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Options as Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Understanding your Analyzer’s Option Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Option 010, Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 014, Configurable Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 080, Frequency Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments without Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments with Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 1E1, Source Attenuator (Extended Power Range). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option 897, Built-In Tests for Commercial Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option 898 Built-In Tests for Standards Compliant Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option F13P04, 13.5 GHz Frequency Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option F20P04, 20 GHz Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Option S02, Second Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Analyzer Accessories and Upgrades Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Pulse I/O Adapter-N1966A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Required Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Contacting Agilent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3
Tests and Adjustments
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Chapter Three at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Verify the Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents-1
Contents
Review the Principles of Connector Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
About System Verification and Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Certificate of Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
The Operator’s Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
The Test Port Cable Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
System Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
What the System Verification Verifies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Measurement Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Measurement Traceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Performing System Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Source Power Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Source Maximum Power Output Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Source Power Linearity Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Frequency Accuracy Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Trace Noise Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Receiver Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Noise Floor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Calibration Coefficients Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Dynamic Accuracy Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
EE Default Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
LO Power Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Source Calibration Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Receiver Calibration Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
4
Troubleshooting
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chapter Four at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Getting Started with Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Check the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Troubleshooting Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Power Up Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Power Supply Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Front Panel Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
A2 Display Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Checking the USB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
A3 Front Panel Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Contents-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents
Rear Panel Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Checking the USB Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Checking the SERIAL (RS-232), PARALLEL (1284-C), or VGA Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Checking the GPIB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
LAN Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Measurement System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Before you begin—consider: Where do you see a problem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard S-Parameter Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Where to Begin Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Checking the Source Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Checking the Signal Separation Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Checking the Receiver Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Microwave PNA, N5230C, Options 140 and 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Microwave PNA, N5230C, Options 145 and 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Microwave PNA, N5230C, Options 146 and 246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
5
Theory of Operation
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Chapter Five at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Network Analyzer System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Functional Groups of the Network Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Synthesized Source Group Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Frequency Offset Operation (Option 080) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A7, A9, and A13 (Options 146 and 246) Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A6, A8, and A12 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS 26.5) (MASSQuad). 5-9
A10 Frequency Reference Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
A16 Test Set Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
A17 Source 2 ALC and Bias Control (QABC) Board (Options 146 and 246) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Signal Separation Group Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS 26.5) (MASSQuad). . . .
5-17
A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
A25 (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246) and A26 (Options 146 and 246) 60-dB Source Step Attenuator . . . . . 5-17
Configurable Test Set (Options 145, 146, 245, and 246). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Receiver Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
A20 Mixer Brick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
A5 SPAM Board (Analog Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Front Panel Subgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Power Supply Group Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents-3
Contents
6
Replaceable Parts
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Chapter Six at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Replaceable Parts Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Top Assemblies, Options 146/246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Bottom Cables, Options 140 and 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Bottom Cables, Options 145 and 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Bottom Cables, Options 146 and 246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Rear Panel Assembly, All Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Miscellaneous Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
7
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Chapter Seven at-a-Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Personal Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Removing the Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Removing and Replacing the A11 Vertical Motherboard and the Plenum Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Removing and Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Removing and Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard and the USB Hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Removing and Replacing the A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Contents-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents
Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and Coupler Mounting Blocks . . . . 7-38
Removing and Replacing the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Removing and Replacing the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Post-Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
8
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Information in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Chapter Eight at-a-Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Using Error Terms as a Diagnostic Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Performing Measurement Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Using Flowgraphs to Identify Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Accessing Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Error Term Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Option Enable Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Accessing the Option Enable Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Enabling or Removing Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Repairing and Recovering Option Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Installing or Changing a Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
How to Check the Current Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Downloading from the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Operating System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Recovering from Hard Disk Drive Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Storing Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
Contents-5
Contents
Contents-6
Service Guide N5230-90025
1
Safety and Regulatory Information
Service Guide N5230-90025
1-1
Safety and Regulatory Information
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
This chapter provides safety information that will help protect you and your network analyzer. It also
contains information that is required by various government regulatory agencies.
Chapter One at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Safety Symbols
Descriptions of CAUTION and WARNING symbols
used throughout this manual.
Page 1-3
General Safety Considerations
A list of safety points to consider when servicing your
network analyzer.
Page 1-3
Electrostatic Discharge Protection
A discussion of electrostatic discharge (ESD) and
related recommendations and requirements for ESD
protection.
Page 1-6
Regulatory Information
Definitions of instrument markings.
Page 1-7
Instructions for disposing of the analyzer’s lithium
battery.
1-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Symbols
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols
and its meaning before operating this instrument.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed
beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a
warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
General Safety Considerations
Safety Earth Ground
WARNING
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated
in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with
a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor, inside or outside
of the instrument, will make the instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is
prohibited.
CAUTION
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this product. Failure to ensure
adequate grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage.
Before Applying Power
WARNING
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the equipment could be
impaired. This product must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for
protection are intact) only.
WARNING
If an instrument handle is damaged, you should replace it immediately. Damaged handles
can break while you are moving or lifting the instrument and cause personal injury or
damage to the instrument.
CAUTION
This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply voltage is within the
specified range.
CAUTION
This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC
Service Guide N5230-90025
1-3
Safety and Regulatory Information
General Safety Considerations
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
61010-1:2001 and 664 respectively.
CAUTION
Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the convection into and
out of the product must not be restricted. The ambient temperature (outside the cabinet)
must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 C for every
100 watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater
than 800 watts, then forced convection must be used.
CAUTION
The measuring terminals on this instrument are designed to be used with external signals
described in Measurement Category I, but NOT with external signals described in Categories
II, III, and IV. The input of this instrument cannot be connected to the mains.
Servicing
WARNING
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid electrical
shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended. Discard used batteries according to local ordinances
and/or manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING
Procedures described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the
product while protective covers are removed. Energy available at many points may, if
contacted, result in personal injury.
WARNING
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel. To prevent
electrical shock, do not remove covers.
WARNING
The opening of covers or removal of parts may expose dangerous voltages. Disconnect the
instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened.
1-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Safety and Regulatory Information
General Safety Considerations
WARNING
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace line fuse only with same type and
rating. The use of other fuses or material is prohibited.
WARNING
The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the
mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument. The front panel
switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).
Service Guide N5230-90025
1-5
Safety and Regulatory Information
Electrostatic Discharge Protection
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Electrostatic Discharge Protection
Protection against electrostatic discharge (ESD) is essential while removing assemblies from or connecting
cables to the network analyzer. Static electricity can build up on your body and can easily damage sensitive
internal circuit elements when discharged. Static discharges too small to be felt can cause permanent
damage. To prevent damage to the instrument:
•
always have a grounded, conductive table mat in front of your test equipment.
•
always wear a grounded wrist strap, connected to a grounded conductive table mat, having a 1 M
resistor in series with it, when handling components and assemblies or when making connections.
•
always wear a heel strap when working in an area with a conductive floor. If you are uncertain about the
conductivity of your floor, wear a heel strap.
•
always ground yourself before you clean, inspect, or make a connection to a static-sensitive device or
test port. You can, for example, grasp the grounded outer shell of the test port or cable connector briefly.
•
always ground the center conductor of a test cable before making a connection to the analyzer test port
or other static-sensitive device. This can be done as follows:
1. Connect a short (from your calibration kit) to one end of the cable to short the center conductor to the
outer conductor.
2. While wearing a grounded wrist strap, grasp the outer shell of the cable connector.
3. Connect the other end of the cable to the test port and remove the short from the cable.
Figure 1-1 shows a typical ESD protection setup using a grounded mat and wrist strap. Refer to “ESD
Supplies” on page 6-49 for part numbers.
Figure 1-1
1-6
ESD Protection Setup
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Safety and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
This section contains information that is required by various government regulatory agencies.
Service Guide N5230-90025
1-7
Safety and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Instrument Markings
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with this symbol
when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If
accompanied by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
ICES/NMB-001
This is a marking to indicate product compliance with the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-001).
This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product.
This is a required mark signifying compliance with an EMC requirement. The C-Tick
mark is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum Management Agency.
This product complies with the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) marking requirements. The
affixed label indicates that you must not discard this electrical/ electronic product in
domestic household waste.
Product Category: With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE Directive Annex I,
this product is classed as a “Monitoring and Control instrumentation” product.
Do not dispose in domestic household waste.
To return unwanted products, contact your local Agilent office, or see
http://www.agilent.com/environment/product/ for more information.
This product complies with the China RoHS regulation. A paper is included with the
shipment that has a Toxic Substance Table showing the hazardous substances in the
product.
This symbol indicates compliance with China RoHS regulations for paper/fiberboard
packaging.
1-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
KCC-REM-ATiXXXXXXXXXXX
Safety and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
Korean Certification (KC) mark. Must include the marking’s identifier code (Agilent product
specific) as follows:
KCC-REM-ATi- WNANALYZERF01
Lithium Battery Disposal
If the battery on the A15 CPU board assembly needs to be disposed of, dispose of it in accordance with your
country’s requirements. If required, you may return the battery to Agilent Technologies for disposal. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11 for assistance.
For instructions on removing and replacing the battery on the A15 CPU board assembly, refer to “Removing
and Replacing the Lithium Battery” on page 7-56.
Service Guide N5230-90025
1-9
Safety and Regulatory Information
Regulatory Information
1-10
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
2
General Product Information
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-1
General Product Information
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
Chapter Two at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Maintenance
Cleaning instructions for the external surfaces of
your analyzer.
Page 2-3
Information about electrical maintenance of your
analyzer.
Analyzer Options Available
A list of the options available for the microwave
network analyzers.
Page 2-3
Analyzer Accessories and Upgrades
Available
A hyperlink to the PNA Configuration Guide, which
includes a list of accessories and upgrades available
for the microwave network analyzers.
Page 2-6
Required Service Test Equipment
A list of service equipment that is required to
perform system verification, performance tests,
adjustments, and troubleshooting.
Page 2-7
The Internet address (URL) for on-line assistance.
Service and support options available.
Agilent Support, Services, and
Assistance
Page 2-10
Calibration options available.
Important information about shipping your analyzer
to Agilent for service or repair.
2-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Product Information
Maintenance
Maintenance
WARNING
To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from the mains source before
cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external case
parts. Do not attempt to clean internally.
Physical Maintenance
Clean the cabinet, including the front panel, using a dry or slightly damp cloth only.
Electrical Maintenance
Refer to “Review the Principles of Connector Care” on page 3-5.
Analyzer Options Available
Options as Upgrades
The options described in this section can be ordered as upgrades. Refer to “Analyzer Accessories and
Upgrades Available” on page 2-6.
Refer also to “Upgrade Kits” on page 6-49 for a complete list of available upgrade kits.
Understanding your Analyzer’s Option Numbers
The option number contains a basic description of your analyzer as shown below. Other options, such as 010
or 080, may be added to extend this description. All options are described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 2-1
Understanding your Analyzer’s Option Numbers
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-3
General Product Information
Analyzer Options Available
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Option 010, Time Domain
This option can be added to any other option combination.
An Option 010 analyzer can display the time domain response of a network or test device by calculating the
inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. This calculation allows the Option 010 analyzer
to show the response of a test device as a function of time or distance. In time domain, the magnitude and
location of a discontinuity and the characteristics of individual transmission paths of a network or test
device can be determined. Time domain operation retains all the accuracy of active error correction.
Option 014, Configurable Test Set
This option is included in Options 145, 146, 245, and 246.
An Option 014 analyzer can be configured to measure high-power devices and devices for high dynamic
range.
For a high-power measurement, external amplifiers and high power attenuators or isolators can be added to
complete the test setup. Test port output power up to 1 Watt (+30 dBm) can be applied to the device under
test (DUT).
Additionally, there is an external reference input that allows the external amplifier’s frequency response and
drift to be ratioed out.
For high dynamic range measurements, front panel jumpers are moved to reverse the signal path through
one of the couplers, allowing for a 15 dB improvement in transmitted signal sensitivity in one direction only.
Jumpers are installed on both ports allowing the user to choose a measurement in either the forward or
reverse direction.
Option 080, Frequency Offset Mode
This option can be added to any other option combination.
This upgrade enables the additional firmware necessary to make frequency offset measurements.
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments without Handles
Option 1CM provides a rack mount kit that contains a pair of flanges, rack mount rails, and the necessary
hardware to mount the analyzer in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches) horizontal spacing.
Additional kits may be ordered from Agilent. Refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits” on page 6-49 for
the part numbers.
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit for Instruments with Handles
Option 1CP provides a rack mount kit that contains a pair of flanges (cut to adapt to handles), rack mount
rails, and the necessary hardware to mount the analyzer in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches)
horizontal spacing.
Additional kits may be ordered from Agilent. Refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits” on page 6-49 for
the part numbers.
2-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Product Information
Analyzer Options Available
Option 1E1, Source Attenuator (Extended Power Range)
This option is included in Options 145, 146, 245, and 246.
This option adds a single 60-dB step attenuator in the signal path of the measurement ports. This step
attenuator is used to adjust the power level (in 10 db steps) to the device under test (DUT) without changing
the power in the reference path.
Option 897, Built-In Tests for Commercial Calibration
This option enables performance tests that are built into the analyzer that enable you to perform ISO 9001
commercial calibration of your analyzer. Refer to “Service and Support Options” on page 2-10 for a
description of the commercial calibration.
Option 898 Built-In Tests for Standards Compliant Calibration
This option enables performance tests that are built into the analyzer that enable you to perform ISO 17025
and ANSI Z540 standards compliant calibration of your analyzer. Refer to “Service and Support Options” on
page 2-10 for a description of the standards compliant calibrations.
Option F13P04, 13.5 GHz Frequency Range
This is a 4-port network analyzer with an upper frequency limit of 13.5 GHz. This option is included in
Options 140, 145, and 146.
Option F20P04, 20 GHz Frequency Range
This is a 4-port network analyzer with an upper frequency limit of 20 GHz. This option is included in Options
240, 245, and 246.
Option S02, Second Source
This options adds a second source output with an internal second 60-dB step attenuator in this second
source signal path. This option is included in Options 146 and 246.
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-5
General Product Information
Analyzer Accessories and Upgrades Available
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Analyzer Accessories and Upgrades Available
To see a list of the accessories and upgrades available for the network analyzers, including ordering
information, refer to the Agilent PNA Family Microwave Network Analyzers Configuration Guide, available
online at http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/5990-7745EN.pdf
Pulse I/O Adapter-N1966A
An adapter for connecting between the analyzer’s rear-panel PULSE I/O connector and the coaxial inputs
and outputs of external pulse generators and external pulse modulators. The adapter contains 11 SMB-male
coaxial connectors and a mating connector for the rear-panel PULSE I/O connector.
This adapter can be ordered as model number N1966A.
Figure 2-2.
2-6
Pulse I/O Adapter
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Product Information
Required Service Test Equipment
Required Service Test Equipment
Equipment
Critical Specifications
Recommended
Model or Part
Number
Alternate
Model or Part
Number
Usea
Test Instruments and Software
Frequency counter
Freq: 10 MHz to 10.5 GHz
Accuracy : 0.5 ppm
53151A
Opt 001
None
P, A, T
Spectrum analyzer
Min Freq: 1 MHz
Max Freq: > 4 GHz
Resolution BW: 300 Hz
8565E
856xE
A, T
Power meter
Accuracy: ±0.0068 dB
E4418B/19B
E4418A/19Ab
P, A, T
Power sensor
Freq: 300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
Range: –30 to +20 dBm
8482A
None
P, A, T
Power sensor
Freq: 3.0 GHz to 13. 5 or 20 GHz
Range: –30 to +20 dBm
E4413A
None
P, A, T
Dynamic accuracy
test set
None specified
U3020AD01
None
P
None specified
U3070AK01
None
P
Any
T
Gain Compression Test
Set
Digital multi-meter
Voltage and resistance measurement
capability
Any
Voltage resolution: 10 mV
Printer
N/A
Any printer with Microsoft Windows
2000 driver
P
Test softwarec
N/A
N7840A
P
None
a. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, V = System verification
b. If an accurate measurement of the dynamic accuracy specification is not required, the E4418A or E4419A can be
used.
c. The recommended model or part number for all equipment listed with a “P” in the Use column is required for proper
operation of this test software.
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-7
General Product Information
Required Service Test Equipment
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Required Service Test Equipment (Cont’d)
Equipment
a
Recommended
Model or Part
Number
Critical Specifications
Alternate Model
or Part Number
Useb
Calibration and Verification Kits
3.5 mm calibration kit
--
3.5 mm verification kit
--
85052B
DC to 26.5 GHz
85053B
300 kHz to 26.5 GHz
85052D
DC to 26.5 GHz
P,T
None
V
A
Cables
BNC cable (2 required)
50, length  60 cm
8120-1839
None
3.5 mm RF cable (2 required)
50, length  60 cm
85131C
85131E
GPIB cable
N/A
10833A/B/C/D
None
P,A,V
P,A
Adapters
3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
Return Loss:  32 dB
83059B
85052-60012c
P,A,T
3.5 mm (f) to type-N (m)
Return Loss:  28 dB
1250-1743
None
P,A,T
Attenuators
3.5 mm (m,f), 10-dB fixed
attenuator
Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB
Freq: 10 MHz to 13.5 or 20 GHz
8493C
Option 010
None
P
3.5 mm (m,f), 20-dB fixed
attenuator
Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB
Freq: 10 MHz to 13.5 or 20 GHz
8493C
Option 020
None
P
a. Unless specified otherwise, equipment listed is required for all analyzer models.
b. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, R = Repair, V = System verification
c. Included in the 85052B/D calibration kits.
2-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Product Information
Required Service Test Equipment
Required Service Test Equipment (Cont’d)
Equipmenta
Critical Specifications
Recommended
Model or Part
Number
Alternate
Model
Number
Useb
Tools
Extender board
N/A
E8356-60021
None
T
T-8 TORX driver
0.6 N-m (5 in-lb) setting
N/A
N/A
R
T-10 TORX driver
0.5, 0.8, and 1.0 N-m
(4, 7, and 9 in-lb) settings
N/A
N/A
T, R
T-15 TORX driver
1.5 N-m (14 in-lb) setting
N/A
N/A
T, R
T-20 TORX driver
2.4 N-m (21 in-lb) setting
N/A
N/A
T, R
1/4 inch and 5/16 inch open-end
wrench
Thin profile
8710-0510
N/A
A, R
5/16 inch, open-end torque wrench
(metric equivalent is 8 mm)
1.1 and 2.4 N-m (10 and 21
in-lb) settings (for semi-rigid
cables)
N/A
N/A
T, R
1 inch, open-end torque wrench
(metric equivalent is 26 mm)
8.1 N-m (72 in-lb) setting (for
test port connector nuts)
N/A
N/A
R
20 mm, open-end torque wrench
0.9 N-m (8 in-lb) setting (for
test port measurement
connections)
8710-1764
N/A
P, A, T
Static Safety Parts
Adjustable antistatic wrist strap
N/A
9300-1367
None
P, A, T
Antistatic wrist strap grounding
cord (5 foot)
N/A
9300-0980
None
P, A, T
Static control table mat and earth
ground wire
N/A
9300-0797
None
P, A, T
Any
None
P, A, R
Miscellaneous
USB flash ROM drive
N/A
a. Unless specified otherwise, equipment listed is required for all analyzer models.
b. P = Performance tests, A = Adjustments, T = Troubleshooting, R = Repair, V = System verification
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-9
General Product Information
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance
Information on the following topics is included in this section.
•
“Service and Support Options”
•
“Contacting Agilent”
•
“Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair”
Service and Support Options
The analyzer’s standard warranty period is one-year from the time of initial delivery. All repairs require the
analyzer to be shipped to the nearest Agilent Technologies service center. Extended warranty periods can be
purchased with the initial product purchase.
There are many other repair and calibration options available from the Agilent Technologies support
organization. These options cover a range of service agreements with a variety of time frames. The following
support products with their associated options are available for purchase with the initial product purchase.
•
R1280A Return to Agilent Warranty and Service Plan
Options are available to extend the warranty period to three or five years.
•
R1282A Return to Agilent Calibration Plan
The analyzer is delivered with a one-year calibration certificate. Options are available to have Agilent
Technologies provide three or five year calibration coverage (perform the annual calibration two or four
times). Options for basic calibration or ISO 17025 or ANSI Z540 standards compliant calibrations are
available. After calibration, the analyzer will be returned with a calibration label, a calibration certificate,
and the calibration data.
•
R1288A Return to Agilent On-Site Warranty and Service Plan
Same as R1280A, but the service is provided at the customer site.
•
R1298A Return to Agilent On-Site Calibration Plan
Same as R1282A, but the service is provided at the customer site.
For more information on these and other service, please visit http://service.tm.agilent.com/infoline/ or
refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11. If the warranty or calibration plan period has expired, these
services are available on a per-incident basis. Visit this InfoLine web site or contact Agilent to obtain a
quote.
2-10
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Product Information
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance
Contacting Agilent
Assistance with test and measurements needs and information on finding a local Agilent office are available
on the Web at:
http://www.agilent.com/find/assist
If you do not have access to the Internet, please contact your Agilent field engineer.
NOTE
In any correspondence or telephone conversation, refer to the Agilent product by its model
number and full serial number. With this information, the Agilent representative can
determine whether your product is still within its warranty period.
Shipping Your Analyzer to Agilent for Service or Repair
IMPORTANT
Agilent Technologies reserves the right to reformat or replace the internal hard disk drive in
your analyzer as part of its repair. This will erase all user information stored on the hard disk.
It is imperative, therefore, that you make a backup copy of your critical test data located on
the analyzer’s hard disk before shipping it to Agilent for repair.
If you wish to send your network analyzer to Agilent Technologies for service or repair:
•
Include a complete description of the service requested or of the failure and a description of any failed
test and any error message.
•
Remove and retain the front handles and all rack mount hardware. The analyzer should be sent to Agilent
in the same configuration as it was originally shipped.
•
Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable antistatic packaging materials.
•
Contact Agilent for instructions on where to ship your analyzer. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page
2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
2-11
General Product Information
Agilent Support, Services, and Assistance
2-12
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
3
Tests and Adjustments
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-1
Tests and Adjustments
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
This chapter contains procedures to help you check, verify, and adjust your PNA.
•
The checks verify the operation of the assemblies in your analyzer.
•
The verification compares the operation of your analyzer to a gold standard.
•
The adjustments allow you to tune your analyzer for maximum response.
NOTE
A description of the performance tests in the Agilent N7840A software package is included
in this chapter. The Agilent N7840A software package must be purchased separately.
Chapter Three at-a-Glance
Section Title
Before You Begin
Summary of Content
Start Page
Items to consider or procedures to perform before testing is begun:
Page 3-4
•
Verify the Operating Environment
•
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
•
Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up
•
Review the Principles of Connector Care
Page 3-6
Descriptions of:
About System Verification
and Performance Tests
•
System Specifications
•
Instrument Specifications
•
System Verification Procedure
•
Performance Tests
•
Certificate of Calibration
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994
Verification
The ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 process of verifying your analyzer.
Non-ANSI/NCSL
Z540–1–1994 Verification
The non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 process of verifying your
analyzer.
Page 3-8
Page 3-9
Performing the operator’s check.
Preliminary Checks
Checking your test cables.
Page 3-10
Perform these checks before performing system verification.
What the system verification does.
System Verification
Page 3-19
How to perform the verification test.
How to interpret the results.
3-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Section Title
Performance Tests (Agilent
N7840A Software
Package)a
Summary of Content
Start Page
A brief summary of each performance test in the Agilent N7840A
software package:
Page 3-28
•
Source Power Accuracy Test
•
Source Maximum Power Output Test
•
Source Power Linearity Test
•
Frequency Accuracy Test
•
Trace Noise Test
•
Receiver Compression Test
•
Noise Floor Test
•
Calibration Coefficients Test
•
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Setups and procedures for adjusting your analyzer:
Adjustments
Tests and Adjustments
Information in This Chapter
•
10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment
•
LO Power Adjustment
•
Source Calibration Adjustment
•
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Page 3-35
a. The Agilent N7840A software package must be purchased separately.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-3
Tests and Adjustments
Before You Begin
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Before You Begin
Before checking, verifying, or adjusting the analyzer, refer to the following paragraphs to:
•
make sure the operating environment is within its requirements
•
make sure that proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection is provided
•
make sure the analyzer has warmed up properly to achieve system stability
•
review the principles of connector care
Verify the Operating Environment
Due to their operating specifications, the verification and calibration kit devices determine your operating
environment conditions. Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the
foam inserts so they will reach room temperature. As the device dimensions change with temperature, their
electrical characteristics change as well. It is necessary to keep the environmental levels within the
following limits:
•
Temperature: +23 C ± 3 C (Error-corrected temperature range)
Once the measurement calibration has been done, the ambient temperature must be maintained to
within  1 C of the calibration temperature.
•
Humidity: 5% to 95% at 40 C maximum
•
Altitude: 0 to 4,500 meters (14,760 feet.)
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge can seriously damage your
analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the recommendations outlined
in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on page 1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.
Allow the Analyzer to Warm Up
NOTE
3-4
To achieve the maximum system stability, allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 90
minutes.
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Before You Begin
Review the Principles of Connector Care
Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate and repeatable measurements.
Refer to Table 3-1 for tips on connector care.
Prior to making connections to your analyzer, carefully review the information about inspecting, cleaning,
and gaging connectors. Refer to the calibration kit documentation for detailed connector care information.
For course numbers about additional connector care instruction, contact Agilent Technologies. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Table 3-1
Connector Care Quick Reference Guide
Handling and Storage
Do
• Keep connectors clean
Do Not
• Touch mating-plane surfaces
• Extend sleeve or connector nut
• Set connectors contact-end down
• Use plastic end-caps during storage
• Store connectors or adapters loose
Visual Inspection
Do
• Inspect all connectors carefully
Do Not
• Use a damaged connector - ever
• Look for metal particles, scratches, and dents
Connector Cleaning
Do
• Try compressed air first
Do Not
• Use any abrasives
• Get liquid into plastic support beads
• Use isopropyl alcohola
• Clean connector threads
Gaging Connectors
Do
• Clean and zero the gage before use
Do Not
• Use an out-of-specification connector
• Use the correct gage type
• Use correct end of calibration block
• Gage all connectors before first use
Making Connections
Do
• Align connectors carefully
Do Not
• Apply bending force to connection
• Make preliminary connection contact lightly
• Over tighten preliminary connection
• Turn only the connector nut
• Twist or screw any connection
• Use a torque wrench for final connection
• Tighten past torque wrench “break” point
a. Cleaning connectors with alcohol shall only be done with the instrument’s power cord removed, and in a
well-ventilated area. Allow all residual alcohol moisture to evaporate, and the fumes to dissipate prior to
energizing the instrument.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-5
Tests and Adjustments
About System Verification and Performance Tests
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
About System Verification and Performance Tests
The performance of the network analyzer is specified in two ways: system specifications, and instrument
specifications. It is the end user’s responsibility to determine which set of specifications is applicable to
their use of the PNA.
A network analyzer measurement “system” includes the analyzer, calibration kit, test cables, and any
necessary adapters. The system verification software in the PNA is used to verify the system’s
conformance to the “system” specifications. A “pass” result demonstrates that the analyzer, test cables,
and adapters, perform correctly as a system. It DOES NOT demonstrate that any one component performs
according to its individual specifications. A change to any part of this measurement system requires a
re-verification of the system.
Instrument specifications specify the network analyzer’s uncorrected measurement port characteristics and
its output and input behavior. The PNA performance tests are used to verify the analyzer’s conformance to
“instrument” specifications.
System Specifications
System specifications specify warranted performance of the measurement system when making
error-corrected measurements using the same calibration kit and test cables used during the system
verification routine. System specifications are applicable only when the measurement system is used to
make error-corrected measurements.
The analyzer's system specifications are described in the Agilent PNA Series Network Analyzer Technical
Specifications and also in the analyzer’s on-line help system in the section titled “Corrected System
Performance”.
System specifications are expressed in two ways:
•
residual errors of the measurement system shown as tabular specification values
•
graphs of measurement uncertainty versus reflection and transmission coefficients
System specifications are verified in one of the following ways:
•
Complete the system verification procedure using a certified verification kit and certified calibration kit
that will be used for future measurements, or
•
Complete all of the performance tests using a certified calibration kit that will be used for future
measurements. This alternative verifies both the system specifications and the instrument
specifications for the analyzer.
Instrument Specifications
The analyzer's instrument specifications are described in the Agilent PNA Series Network Analyzer
Technical Specifications and also in the analyzer’s on-line help system in the sections titled “Uncorrected
System Performance”, “Test Port Output”, and “Test Port Input”.
These specifications apply when the analyzer is used to make either raw or error-corrected measurements.
System Verification Procedure
The system verification procedure tests the network analyzer measurement “system”, as defined previously,
3-6
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
About System Verification and Performance Tests
against the system specifications. If confirmation is successful, the measurement system is capable of
making measurements to the accuracy specified by the graphs of measurement uncertainty.
The procedure consists of calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit, measuring a set of characterized
devices, and comparing the resultant measured data to the data and uncertainty limits supplied with the
verification kit. The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to NIST. The total
measurement uncertainty limits for the performance verification are the sum of the factory measurement
uncertainties and the uncertainties associated with measuring the same devices on the system being
verified. The difference between the factory-measured data and the verification-measured data must fall
within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the total system uncertainty test to pass.
NOTE
Calibration kits are different from verification kits. Calibration kits are used to determine the
systematic errors of a network analyzer measurement system. Verification kits are used to
confirm system specifications and are not used to generate error correction.
Performance Tests
Performance tests are used to confirm analyzer performance against the “instrument” specifications. If
confirmation is successful, the analyzer meets the instrument specifications.
Performance tests are contained in the N7840A Software Package and are described at “Performance Tests
(Agilent N7840A Software Package)” on page 3-28.
An illustrated outline of the performance verification procedure:
•
for ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 verification, is shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-8.
•
for non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994 verification, is shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-9.
Certificate of Calibration
Agilent Technologies will issue a certificate of calibration upon successful completion of system verification
or completion of the performance tests. The certificate of calibration will apply to the “system” (analyzer,
calibration kit, test cables, and any necessary adapters) if the system verification procedure is used to
confirm the system specifications. If the performance tests are used to confirm instrument specifications,
the certificate of calibration will apply to the PNA as an independent instrument. The equipment and
measurement standards used for the tests must be certified and must be traceable to recognized standards.
NOTE
If you have a measurement application that does not use all of the measurement capabilities
of the analyzer, you may ask your local Agilent Technologies service office to verify only a
subset of the specifications. However, this “limited calibration” creates the possibility of
making inaccurate measurements if you then use the analyzer in an application requiring
additional capabilities.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-7
Tests and Adjustments
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification
To meet the criteria for ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, perform the preliminary checks and all performance tests
without stopping to repair or adjust1. Refer to Figure 3-1 for test flow. Print data at the completion of all the
tests, even if you are aware that the analyzer did not pass. If there is a failure, complete the verification
before you troubleshoot, repair, and adjust. After the failure has been corrected, repeat the entire set of
performance tests and generate a new set of data.
Figure 3-1
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart
1. Stop only in case of a catastrophic failure or cable connector damage
3-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Verification
For non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, perform the preliminary checks and performance tests while stopping to
troubleshoot. Refer to Figure 3-2 for test flow. Troubleshoot and repair the first problem encountered without
continuing to other tests. After you troubleshoot, repair, and adjust, repeat the last failed portion and
generate a new set of data.
Figure 3-2
Non–ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994 Test Path Verification Flowchart
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-9
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Preliminary Checks
Preliminary checks include the following:
•
“The Operator’s Check” on page 3-10
The operator’s check tests the network analyzer’s basic functionality of the source, switch, and
receivers.
•
“The Test Port Cable Checks” on page 3-12
The test port cable checks are not required, but are recommended to verify the performance of the test
port cables before performing the verification test.
The Operator’s Check
NOTE
To achieve the maximum system stability, allow the analyzer to warm up for at least 90
minutes before performing the Operator’s Check.
The operator’s check is a software driven test that checks the basic operation of the assemblies in the Port
1 and Port 2 signal paths. By performing the operator’s check, the following are determined:
•
repeatability of the RF test port switch
•
attenuation ranges of all installed attenuators
•
calibration of the receivers
•
frequency response of the receivers
•
phase lock and leveling
•
noise floor and trace noise
Accessories Used in the Operator’s Check
Equipment Type
Part Number
Female short, 3.5 mm
85052-60007 (from the 85052 calibration kit)
Female open, 3.5 mm
85052-60009 (from the 85052 calibration kit)
Performing the Operator’s Check
1. From the System menu, point to Service, and then click Operator’s Check.
2. In the PNA Operator’s Check dialog box (refer to Figure 3-3), under Configure, select either Prompt for
attachment of Short/Open, to pause at each step in the process to allow moving the short/open to the
appropriate port, or Shorts/Opens are attached to ALL ports, to run through the test without stopping.
Shorts and opens can be mixed on the test ports.
3. Click Begin.
4. If shorts and opens are not connected to all ports, you will be prompted to connect them as they are
needed.
5. The result of the operator’s check will be shown as a PASS or FAIL next to each test (refer to Figure 3-3).
3-10
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
The PNA Operator’s Check dialog box will look different for different PNA model numbers and installed
options. Some of the tests are performed only if the appropriate options are installed in the PNA.
Figure 3-3
Operator’s Check Dialog Box
If the Operator’s Check Fails
1. Clean the test ports, shorts, and adapters. Torque connections to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, suspect a faulty component. Refer to “Measurement System Troubleshooting” on
page 4-23 to begin troubleshooting to determine the faulty component.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-11
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
The Test Port Cable Checks
A faulty test port cable can cause a failure in the verification test. The following checks are not required, but
are recommended to verify the performance of the test port cable.
•
“Cable Return Loss Check” on page 3-13
•
“Cable Insertion Loss Check” on page 3-14
•
“Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check” on page 3-15
•
“Cable Connector Repeatability Check” on page 3-17
Accessories Used in the Test Port Cable Checks
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model
or Part Number
Calibration kit, 3.5 mm
85052B
85052D
Test cable, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
85131C
85131E
3-12
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
Cable Return Loss Check
1. Press Preset.
2. Perform a one-port calibration on Port 1, 1-Port Reflection. Refer to the embedded help in the analyzer if
necessary.
3. Connect the test port cable to Port 1. Connect a broadband load to the other end of the cable. Tighten to
the specified torque for the connector type.
The analyzer now displays the return loss of the cable.
4. From the Marker menu, click Marker Search. In the Marker Search dialog box, in the Search Type box,
make sure Maximum is selected. Click Execute, and then click OK.
5. The marker annotation on the screen indicates the worst case return loss. Refer to the cable manual to
see if it meets the return loss specification. For an example of a typical return loss measurement,
see Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4
Typical Cable Return Loss Response
If the Cable Return Loss Check Fails
1. Clean the cable and devices and torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, the cable should be repaired or replaced.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-13
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Cable Insertion Loss Check
1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a short to the other end of the cable.
2. From the Marker menu, click Marker Search. In the Marker Search dialog box, in the Search Type box,
select Minimum. Click Execute, and then click OK.
3. The displayed response is twice the actual loss. To get the actual worst case insertion loss, divide the
value at the marker annotation by two. Refer to the cable manual to see if it meets the insertion loss
specification. For an example of a typical insertion loss measurement, see Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5
Typical Cable Insertion Loss Response
If the Cable Insertion Loss Check Fails
1. Clean the cable and devices and torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, the cable should be repaired or replaced.
3-14
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check
1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a short to the other end of the cable.
2. Press Preset.
3. On the Trace menu, click New Trace. In the New Trace dialog box, click the S11 box, and then click OK.
4. On the Trace menu, click Format. In the Format dialog box, click Phase, and then click OK.
5. On the Channel menu, click Average. In the Average dialog box, click the Average ON check box. In the
Average Factor box, type 50 or click the arrows to select 50, and then click OK.
6. To provide a good reference, hold the test cable in a straight line perpendicular to the front panel of the
network analyzer.
7. On the Channel menu, click Restart Avg.
8. Wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 50 times (approximately two seconds).
9. To normalize the data trace:
a. On the Trace menu, click Math/Memory.
b. In the Math/Memory dialog box, click the Data->Memory button.
c. In the Data Math list, select Data/Memory.
d. Under Trace View Options, make sure Data Trace is selected.
e. Click OK
10. Slowly make a 180 degree bend in the middle of the cable and hold it in that position.
11. For each trace: On the Scale menu, set the Scale Per Division for optimum viewing as shown in Figure
3-6.
12. Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above the reference line and is within the cable’s
specified frequency range. For a typical response of cable magnitude and phase stability, see Figure 3-6.
13. Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes below the reference line and is within the cable’s
specified frequency range.
In this S11 measurement, the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and
reflected back from the short. Therefore, the measured deflection value must be divided in half to reach
the correct value.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-15
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
Figure 3-6
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Typical Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Response
If the Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability Check Fails
1. Clean the cable and devices and torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, the cable should be repaired or replaced.
3-16
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
Cable Connector Repeatability Check
NOTE
The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as well as at the
end of the test port cable.
1. With the test port cable still connected to Port 1, connect a broadband load to the other end of the cable.
2. Press Preset.
3. On the Channel menu, click Average. In the Average dialog box, click the Average ON check box. In the
Average Factor box, type 100 or click the arrows to select 100. Click OK.
4. Wait for the analyzer to average the measurement 100 times (approximately five seconds).
5. To normalize the data trace:
a. On the Trace menu, click Math/Memory.
b. In the Math/Memory dialog box, click the Data->Memory button.
c. In the Data Math list, select Data/Memory.
d. Under Trace View Options, make sure Data Trace is selected.
e. Click OK
6.
To adjust the display scale:
a. On the Scale menu, click Scale.
b. In the Scale Per Division box, click the arrow to select 0.5 dB.
c. In the Level box under Reference click the arrow to select 0 dB.
d. Click OK.
7. Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port. Tighten the connection to the specified torque
for the connector type.
8. On the Channel menu, click Restart Avg.
9. Look at the trace for spikes or modes.
10. To re-normalize the data trace of the reconnected cable:
a. On the Trace menu, click Math/Memory.
b. In the Math/Memory dialog box, click the Data->Memory button.
c. Click OK.
11. Repeat steps 7 through 9 at least three times to look for modes. Modes appear when a harmonic of the
source fundamental frequency is able to propagate through the cable or connector. It is helpful to print a
plot of the trace each time to compare several connections. If any mode appears each time the cable is
connected and reconnected, measurement integrity will be affected.
For a typical response of cable connector repeatability, see Figure 3-7.
12. For the Port 2 Check, connect the cable (with the load attached) to Port 2 and repeat steps 2 through 11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-17
Tests and Adjustments
Preliminary Checks
Figure 3-7
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Typical Cable Connector Repeatability Response
If the Cable Connector Repeatability Check Fails
1. Clean the cable and devices, and torque to specification. Repeat the check.
2. If the check still fails, the cable should be repaired or replaced.
3-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
System Verification
System verification is used to verify system-level, error-corrected uncertainty limits for network analyzer
measurements. The verification procedure is automated and is contained in the firmware of the analyzer.
The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to a national standard. The difference
between the supplied traceable data and the measured data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all
frequencies for the system verification to pass.
The total measurement uncertainty limits for the system verification are the sum of the factory
measurement uncertainties for the verification devices and the uncertainties associated with the system
being verified. You can determine your system measurement uncertainty limits by referring to the analyzer’s
on-line embedded help.
IMPORTANT
Passing this system verification does not guarantee that the analyzer meets all of its
performance specifications. However, it does show that the network analyzer being verified
measures the same devices with the same results as a factory system which has had all of
its specifications verified and its total measurement uncertainty minimized.
What the System Verification Verifies
The system verification procedure verifies proper operation of the:
•
network analyzer
•
calibration kit
•
test port cables (with any necessary adapters)
together as a “system”. It DOES NOT verify that any of these components pass their specifications
independently. The user is responsible for independently calibrating and verifying the proper operation of the
calibration kit and test port cables prior to performing the system verification.
NOTE
Additional equipment or accessories used with the above system are not verified by system
verification.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-19
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Measurement Uncertainty
Measurement uncertainty is defined as the sum of:
•
the residual systematic (repeatable) errors, and
•
the random (non-repeatable) errors
in the measurement system after calibration.
The systematic errors are:
•
directivity,
•
source match,
•
load match,
•
reflection and transmission frequency tracking, and
•
isolation (crosstalk).
The random errors include:
•
noise,
•
drift,
•
connector repeatability, and
•
test cable stability.
A complete description of system errors and how they affect measurements is provided in the analyzer’s
on-line embedded help.
Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms. The
precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device
response. When the phase of an error response is not known, phase is assumed to be worst-case (180 to
+180). Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a
root-sum-of-the-squares (RSS) manner.
3-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
Measurement Traceability
To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network analyzer system, the
overall system performance is verified through the measurement of devices that have a traceable path. This
is accomplished by measuring the devices in an Agilent verification kit.
The measurement of the devices in the verification kit has a traceable path because the factory system that
measured the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring standards that have a traceable path to the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (see Figure 3-8). This chain of measurements defines
how the verification process brings traceability to the network analyzer system.
Figure 3-8
NIST Traceability Path for Calibration and Verification Standard
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-21
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Performing System Verification
The following verification procedure is automated by the analyzer firmware. The process for the verification
is:
•
connect cables to the analyzer test ports
•
perform a calibration or recall a recent calibration
•
run the system verification program for the verification devices
To verify all four ports, it is necessary to perform the verification process outlined above twice—once for
ports 1 and 2 and once for ports 3 and 4.
Each time through the verification process, you are prompted to make necessary connections and perform
or recall a calibration as part of performing the verification. If you select to perform a calibration, you are
guided through the calibration procedure. This part of the process can be eliminated if you choose to load an
existing recent calibration. If necessary, refer to the analyzer’s on-line embedded help for information on
storing and recalling calibrations.
For each verification device, the analyzer reads a file from the verification disk and sequentially measures
the magnitude and phase for all four S-parameters.
IMPORTANT
For system verification to perform correctly, it is NECESSARY that the verification devices be
measured with their female connectors connected to the analyzer’s test ports.
NOTE
Although the performance for all S-parameters are measured, the S11, S22, S33, and S44
phase uncertainties for the attenuators and airlines are less important for verifying system
performance. Therefore, the limit lines will not appear on the printout.
Equipment Used in the System Verification Procedure
3.5 mm
Equipment Type
Type-N
Calibration kit
85052B, C, D
N4691A E-cal
85054B/D
N4690A E-cal
Verification kit
85053B
85055A
Cables
Single cable: 85131C/E
Cable pair: 85131D/F
Single cable: 85132C/E (3.5 mm NMD to 7 mm)
Cable pair: 85132D/F (3.5 mm NMD to 7 mm)
None required.
With single cable: an 85130C adapter and a 7mm to Type-N
adapter from the 85054B calibration kit.
With cable pair: Two 7mm to Type-N adapters from the 85054B
calibration kit.
Adapters
3-22
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
Cable Substitution
The test port cables specified for the network analyzer system have been characterized for connector
repeatability, magnitude and phase stability with flexing, return loss, insertion loss, and aging rate. Since
test port cable performance is a significant contributor to the system performance, cables of lower
performance will increase the uncertainty of your measurement. Refer to the plots in the cable tests (earlier
in this chapter) that show the performance of good cables. It is highly recommended that the test port
cables be regularly tested.
If the system verification is performed with a non-Agilent cable, ensure that the cable meets or exceeds the
specifications for the test cable specified in the previous table, “Equipment Used in the System Verification
Procedure.” Refer to the cable’s user’s guide for specifications.
Kit Substitution
Non-Agilent calibration kits and verification kits are not recommended nor supported.
System Verification Procedure
1. If you desire printed test outputs, connect a printer to the analyzer. For the printer, ensure that the
correct driver is loaded and the printer is defined as the default printer. Refer to the embedded help in the
analyzer for printer setup. Let the analyzer warm up for at least 90 minutes.
2. Insert the verification kit disk into the analyzer disk drive.
3. On the System menu, point to Service, and then click System Verification. The System Verification
dialog box is displayed; refer to Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9
System Verification Dialog Box
4. In the Calibration Kit box, select the calibration kit or electronic calibration module (ECal) that is being
used by clicking on it. The corresponding verification kit to use is selected for you and displayed in the
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-23
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Verification Kit box. Refer to Figure 3-9.
5. Under Printer Output, click one of the following options. Refer to Figure 3-9.
•
Print Tabular Data: Prints the verification data in tabular form which includes measured data and
uncertainty limits. For an example, refer to Figure 3-11 on page 3-26.
•
Print Graphs: Prints the verification data in graphical form. The graphical form includes the measured
data trace, factory supplied data trace, and uncertainty limits. For an example, refer to Figure 3-12 on
page 3-27.
•
File Tabular Data: Writes the tabular data to a text file in the C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network
Analyzer\Documents\ directory.
•
File Graphs: Saves a screen image in PNG format in the C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network
Analyzer\Documents\ directory.
NOTE
For printed output, it is assumed that the printer has been tested and the Windows driver is
installed for the printer that is being used. The system verification test prints to the printer
that has been designated as the default printer. (On the Windows Desktop display, click on
My Computer, Control Panel, and then Printers to verify the printer setup.)
To modify the number of ports to be verified or to change the number of devices to measure, click on
the Configure tab and make the desired selections.
6. Click Run.
7. Follow the instructions on the analyzer for performing a full calibration or recalling an existing recent
calibration.
8. Follow the instructions on the analyzer for performing the system verification, inserting the verification
devices as prompted.
3-24
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
If the System Fails the Verification Test
IMPORTANT
Inspect all connections. Do not remove the cable from the analyzer test port. This will
invalidate the calibration that you performed earlier.
1. Disconnect and clean the device that failed the verification test.
2. Reconnect the device making sure that all connections are torqued to the proper specifications.
3. Measure the device again.
4. If the analyzer still fails the test, check the measurement calibration by viewing the error terms as
described in “Accessing Error Terms” in Chapter 8.
5. Refer to Figure 3-10 for additional troubleshooting steps.
Figure 3-10
System Verification Failure Flowchart
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-25
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Interpreting the Verification Results
Figure 3-11 shows an example of typical verification results with Print Tabular Data selected in the Printer
Output area of the System Verification dialog box.
At the top of the printed output is the name of the device, the serial number of the device, and the date
tested.
Each S-parameter measurement result is printed with frequency tested, lower and upper limit lines, the
measured data, and the result of the test.
Figure 3-11
Example of Printed Tabular Verification Results
Sys Ver -- 20 dB attenuator magnitude results, Serial #00810 -- 6 Sep 2000
S11 Results
Frequency
Lower Limit
Measured Data
0.3 MHz
0.0048 Units
0.0090 Units
Upper Limit
0.0139 Units
100
0.0046
0.0091
0.0137
PASS
200
0.0042
0.0092
0.0134
PASS
300
0.0040
0.0091
0.0133
PASS
400
0.0038
0.0089
0.0131
PASS
500
0.0036
0.0087
0.0129
PASS
600
0.0034
0.0085
0.0127
PASS
700
0.0031
0.0082
0.0125
PASS
800
0.0029
0.0080
0.0122
PASS
900
0.0026
0.0079
0.0119
PASS
1000
0.0023
0.0075
0.0117
PASS
1100
0.0020
0.0072
0.0114
PASS
1200
0.0017
0.0068
0.0111
PASS
1300
0.0013
0.0064
0.0107
PASS
1400
-0.0006
0.0059
0.0118
PASS
1500
-0.0011
0.0052
0.0113
PASS
1600
-0.0015
0.0044
0.0108
PASS
1700
-0.0020
0.0038
0.0103
PASS
1800
-0.0026
0.0032
0.0097
PASS
1900
-0.0031
0.0024
0.0091
PASS
2000
-0.0036
0.0019
0.0085
PASS
2100
-0.0045
0.0016
0.0082
PASS
2200
-0.0050
0.0018
0.0077
PASS
2300
-0.0054
0.0023
0.0073
PASS
2400
-0.0052
0.0031
0.0075
PASS
2500
-0.0048
0.0039
0.0080
PASS
2600
-0.0040
0.0050
0.0087
PASS
2700
-0.0032
0.0060
0.0094
PASS
2800
-0.0024
0.0071
0.0103
PASS
2900
-0.0014
0.0082
0.0113
PASS
3000
-0.0004
0.0095
0.0124
PASS
Result
PASS
Overall PASS/FAIL result for entire frequency range = PASS
3-26
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
System Verification
Figure 3-12 shows an example of typical verification results with Print Graphs selected in the Printer Output
area of the System Verification dialog box. The printed graphical results show the following:
•
the name of the device measured
•
the serial number of the device
•
the parameters measured
•
Results of the measurements. Labeled as A in Figure 3-12.
•
Data measured at the factory from the verification kit. Labeled as B in Figure 3-12.
•
Upper and lower limit points as defined by the total system uncertainty system. Labeled as C in Figure
3-12.
Figure 3-12
Example of Printed Graphical Verification Results
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-27
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
The Agilent N7840A software package verifies the electrical performance of your N5230C microwave PNA.
The software automatically configures your analyzer to execute the performance tests. The N7840A
software package is not included with the analyzer; it must be ordered separately. The model numbers of the
equipment used are specified under “Required Service Test Equipment” on page 2-7.
There are nine tests in the software package:
•
Source Power Accuracy Test
•
Source Maximum Power Output Test
•
Source Power Linearity Test
•
Frequency Accuracy Test
•
Trace Noise Test
•
Receiver Compression Test
•
Noise Floor Test
•
Calibration Coefficients Test
•
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Source Power Accuracy Test
Function of the Test: To confirm the accuracy of the source output power of your network analyzer over its
full frequency range.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–Power Level Accuracy
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensors, and adapters.
Description of the Test:
1. The analyzer’s output power level is set to 0 dBm.
2. A power sensor is connected to Port 1.
3. The output power is measured at hundreds of CW frequencies across the analyzer’s frequency range and
the values compared to the setting of 0 dBm.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Perform the “Source Calibration Adjustment” on page 3-37 and repeat this test.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, troubleshoot the source section of the analyzer and then repeat this
test. Refer to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-30.
3-28
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
Source Maximum Power Output Test
Function of the Test: To confirm the maximum source output power of your network analyzer over its full
frequency range.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–Maximum Leveled Power
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensors, and adapters.
Description of the Test:
1. A power sensor is connected to Port 1.
2. The analyzer’s output is set to hundreds of CW frequencies and, at each frequency, the output power is
increased until an “UNLEVELED” error is detected.
3. The power level at this point is measured and compared to the maximum output power specification.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Go to “Checking the Signal through the Signal Separation Path” on page 4-39 for troubleshooting
information to determine the faulty assembly.
Source Power Linearity Test
Function of the Test: To verify that the power level is linear over the analyzer’s frequency range and to check
the linearity of the automatic leveling control (ALC).
Specification Tested: Power Sweep Range and Power Level Linearity
Equipment Used: A test cable. (And a 20 dB attenuator if the analyzer does not have an internal step
attenuator.)
Description of the Test:
1. The Port 2 receiver is used to test Port 1. The receiver linearity is the standard against which the source
linearity is checked.
2. A test cable is connected between Port 1 and Port 2 with 20 dB of attenuation in series with the cable.
This can be done with an internal step attenuator or an external 20 dB attenuator. This attenuation
ensures that the receiver remains in its linear range.
3. The analyzer is set to 25 different points across its frequency range.
4. At each frequency point, the output power level on Port 2 is set to 0.000 dBm and the power is measured
to establish a reference, Preference.
5. The source setting is then stepped from -15 to +10 dBm in 1 dB steps and the power is measured,
Pmeasured, at each setting.
6. The non-linearity in dB at each frequency point is calculated as:
(Pmeasured - Preference) - (source setting)
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Perform the “Source Calibration Adjustment” on page 3-37 and repeat this test.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A19 MASSQuad and then repeat this test. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block” on
page 7-34.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-29
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Frequency Accuracy Test
Function of the Test: To verify the frequency accuracy and range of the analyzer’s source output.
Specification Tested: Test Port Output–CW Accuracy
Equipment Used: A frequency counter, a test cable, and adapters.
Description of the Test:
1. Port 1 is connected to a frequency counter.
2. A series of frequencies across the band are checked.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Verify the accuracy of the 10 MHz OCXO by using a frequency counter to measure the rear-panel 10 MHz
REF OUT. If the 10 MHz reference is off by more than 10 Hz, perform the “10 MHz Frequency Reference
Adjustment” on page 3-35 and then repeat this test.
Trace Noise Test
Function of the Test: To measure the stability of a signal in the internal source and receiver system of your
analyzer.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Trace Noise Magnitude and Trace Noise Phase
Equipment Used: A test cable.
Description of the Test:
1. Port 1 and Port 2 are connected with a test cable.
2. The analyzer is set to a series of CW frequencies across its frequency range.
3. Magnitude and phase are measured at each frequency at both 1 kHz and 10 kHz IF bandwidths, in both
directions.
4. Measurements are made at a nominal power level of 0 dBm and 201 points per sweep.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Repeat this test. It is unlikely for the analyzer to fail this test without a complete failure of the network
analyzer system.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A5 SPAM board and then repeat this test. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
3-30
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
Receiver Compression Test
Function of the Test: To measure the compression at the analyzer’s specified maximum power level for the
receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Maximum Test Port Input Level
Equipment Used: The compression test set, a power meter, power sensors, two test cables, and a
calibration kit. (And 10-dB and 20-dB pads if the analyzer does not have an internal step attenuator.)
Description of the Test:
1. All measurements are made with a 1 kHz IF bandwidth and 201 points per sweep.
2. The measurements are made separately on each port.
3. The analyzer is set to various CW frequencies across the range of the analyzer.
4. A power sensor is connected to the “signal source point” to be used to test the port. The “signal source
point” may be either the port connector itself, when a short is used, or the end of the test cable, when
the compression test set is used to source the test signal.
5. The analyzer source output level is adjusted to create the maximum power level specified for the
receiver.
6. The power sensor is disconnected and the “signal source point” is connected to the port to be tested.
7. The absolute log magnitude value (dBm) for the reference channel is read.
8. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pa).
9. The source output level is adjusted to decrease the output by 15 dB.
10. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pb).
11. Attenuation of 20 dB is introduced between the source and receiver. This can be done with an internal
step attenuator, an external 10 dB pad (if a short is being used to reflect the signal back into the port), or
an external 20 dB pad (if the signal source is the compression test set).
12. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pc).
13. The source output level is adjusted to produce a reading of Pref (within ±0.03 dBm) for the reference
channel on the source port.
14. The log magnitude ratioed measurement using the receiver under test is read: (Pd).
15. The compression in dB = (Pa-Pb)-(Pd-Pc).
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
Repeat this test. There are no adjustments that can be made.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A20 mixer brick then repeat this test. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-31
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Noise Floor Test
Function of the Test: To measure the absolute power level of the noise floor for the analyzer’s receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Test Port Noise Floor
Equipment Used: A power meter, power sensor, a calibration kit, and a test cable.
Description of the Test:
1. The analyzer is set to various CW frequencies across its frequency range at an IF bandwidth of 1 kHz
and 801 points per sweep.
2. A test cable is connected to the driving port for the measurement and a power sensor is connected to
the other end of the cable.
3. The power level at the end of the cable is set to -5.00 dBm.
4. The power sensor is disconnected and the cable is connected to the port to be tested.
5. The absolute power level in dBm (log magnitude) is read: (Plog).
6. The test cable is removed and loads are connected to both ports.
7. The analyzer’s trace is set to represent the absolute power level (linear magnitude) for the receiver
under test and a sweep is taken.
8. The mean of the points on the trace, in watts, is read: (Plin).
9. Average power in dBm is calculated: PdBm=10*Log10(Plin*1000).
10. Corrected noise floor in dBm for a 10 Hz IF bandwidth = PdBm-19.96 dB-(5.00-Plog).
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
If the analyzer fails this test, replace the A20 mixer brick and then repeat this test. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A5 SPAM board and then repeat this test. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
3-32
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
Calibration Coefficients Test
Function of the Test: To verify the uncorrected calibration coefficients of your analyzer. The calibration
coefficients are measured in forward and reverse direction. Refer to “Error Terms” in Chapter 8 for error term
information relating to the calibration coefficients measured.
Specification Tested: Uncorrected System Performance
Equipment Used: A calibration kit and a test cable.
Description of the Test:
1. A series of 2-port calibrations are performed. Two full SOLT 2-port calibrations are performed on each
port. Isolation is turned off during each 2-port calibration.
2. A test cable is attached to the first port, and a calibration is performed at the end of the cable and at the
second port. The cable is moved to the second port and another calibration is performed. Using two
calibrations helps to eliminate the unknown characteristics of the through cable.
3. Each calibration produces 12 error terms.
4. The error terms are used to determine the following characteristics: directivity, source match, load
match, reflection tracking, and transmission tracking.
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
If the analyzer fails tracking error terms only, perform “Receiver Calibration Adjustment” on page 3-38
and repeat this test.
•
Failure of any other error terms indicate a hardware failure. Refer to the appropriate error term
discussion in “Error Terms” in Chapter 8 for a typical cause of failure. Refer to Chapter 7, “Repair and
Replacement Procedures,” for instructions on replacing the suspected faulty component or assembly.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-33
Tests and Adjustments
Performance Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Dynamic Accuracy Test
Function of the Test: To measure the relative power linearity of the analyzer’s receivers.
Specification Tested: Test Port Input–Dynamic Accuracy
Equipment Used: The dynamic accuracy test set, a power meter (E4418B or E4419B), power sensors, and
two test cables.
Description of the Test:
1. The analyzer’s test ports are tested separately at a specific CW frequency and a reference power level of
-20 dBm.
2. The analyzer’s driving port is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s source port and the
analyzer’s receiving port is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s receiver port. A power sensor
is connected to the dynamic accuracy test set’s power meter port.
3. The dynamic accuracy test set is used to input a signal from the driving port on the analyzer. The input
signal is routed through step attenuators to both the analyzer and a power sensor.
4. The analyzer source and the dynamic accuracy test set create power levels that are “deltas” from the
reference power level of -20 dBm. Each delta is measured two ways: by the power sensor and by the
analyzer’s receiver under test.
5. The analyzer’s power level into the port under test is set to the -20 dBm reference level.
6. The power level is measured with the power sensor: (Pmr).
7. The power level is measured using the analyzer’s receiver under test: (Ppr).
8. The power level into the analyzer’s port under test is stepped, in 5 dB steps, over the range of 0 to -120
dBm. Each power level represents a “delta” from the reference power level.
9. At each step, the power level is measured using the power meter: (Pmd).
10. At each step, the power level is measured using the receiver under test: (Ppd).
11. The power error in dB = (Pmr-Pmd)-(Ppr-Ppd).
If the Analyzer Fails this Test:
•
If the analyzer fails this test, replace the A20 mixer brick and then repeat this test. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
•
If the analyzer still fails this test, replace the A5 SPAM board and repeat this test. Refer to“Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
3-34
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
Adjustments
These adjustments are firmware-driven tests that are used to fine-tune your analyzer.
If multiple adjustments are to be performed, perform them in the order listed.
•
“10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” on page 3-35
•
“EE Default Adjustment” on page 3-36
•
“LO Power Adjustment” on page 3-36
•
“Source Calibration Adjustment” on page 3-37
•
“Receiver Calibration Adjustment” on page 3-38
10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment
The 10 MHz frequency adjustment is used to adjust the frequency accuracy of the network analyzer’s 10
MHz frequency reference on the A10 frequency reference board assembly.
Equipment Used for the Frequency Adjustment at 10 MHz
Equipment Type
Model or Part Number
Alternate Model or Part Number
Cable, BNC, 50, 24 inch
8120-1839
Any
Frequency counter
53151A, Option 001
Any that will measure a signal at 10 MHz.
Procedure
NOTE
This adjustment typically adjusts to within 0.01 ppm.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-13. Connect a GPIB cable between the network analyzer
and the frequency counter.
Figure 3-13
Setup for Adjustment of the 10 MHz Frequency Reference
2. On the System menu, point to Service, Adjustments, and then click 10 MHz Freq Adjust.
3. Ensure the GPIB settings are correct.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-35
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
4. Click Begin Adj, and then follow the instructions as they are displayed.
EE Default Adjustment
This sets the EEPROM data to their default values.
Procedure
1. Press UTILITY System , then Service , then Adjustments , then click EE Default Adjustment.
2. On the dialog box, select the appropriate adjustment (Ex: Source Synth) for the replaced assembly.
3. On the dialog box, select Initialize rather than Adjust/Verify because an adjustment is typically
unnecessary.
4. Follow the instructions and prompts as they are displayed.
LO Power Adjustment
The LO power adjustment is used to adjust the power level of the LO signal from the A6 multiplier board to
the A20 mixer brick.
Equipment used for the LO Power Adjustment
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model
or Part Number
Power meter
E4418B/E4419B
E4418A/E4419A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm
E4413A
8485A
5/16-inch, open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lbs)
N/A
N/A
Procedure
1. Turn off the network analyzer and remove the power cable and other external cables from the rear panel.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Place the analyzer on its side to allow access to the bottom of the analyzer.
4. Connect a GPIB cable between the analyzer and the power meter.
5. With a 5/16 inch open-end wrench, disconnect cable W3 at the A20 mixer brick. Refer to “Bottom
Cables, Options 140 and 240” on page 6-24 to determine the location of cable W3.
6. Connect the power sensor to the end of cable W3.
7. Reconnect the power and USB cables. Turn on the analyzer.
8. On the System menu, point to Service, Adjustments, and then click LO Power Adjust.
9. Ensure the GPIB settings are correct.
10. Click Begin Adj, and then follow the instructions as they are displayed.
11. Turn off the analyzer, disconnect the power cable, reconnect the semi-rigid cable W3, and replace the
cover.
3-36
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
Source Calibration Adjustment
The source calibration is used to adjust your network analyzer for a flat source power across its full
frequency range. There are differences between each test port; therefore, an adjustment is required for each
port.
Equipment Used for the Source Calibration Adjustment
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model or
Part Number
Power meter
E4418B/E4419B
E4418A/E4419A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm
E4413A
8485A
Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
83059B
85052-60012
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-14. Connect a GPIB cable between the network analyzer
and the power meter.
Figure 3-14
Setup for the Source Calibration Adjustment
2. On the System menu, point to Service, Adjustments, and then click Source Calibration.
3. Ensure the GPIB settings are correct.
4. Click Calibrate, and then follow the instructions as they are displayed.
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-37
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
The receiver calibration is used to adjust the network analyzer receivers for a flat response across its full
frequency range:
1. A power meter/sensor is connected to Port 1, as shown in Figure 3-15, to establish a reference for
flatness.
2. A cable is inserted between the power sensor and the test port, as shown in Figure 3-16, to establish a
reference for the cable.
3. The same cable is connected between test port 1 and test port 2, as shown in Figure 3-17, and a signal
from Port 1 is used to adjust the “B” receiver at Port 2.
The adjustment is repeated using a signal from Port 2 to adjust the “A” receiver at Port 1.
Data obtained during this adjustment are stored in the mxcalfile_pxx files on the hard disk drive. The data
are used in subsequent measurements.
If the hard disk drive is replaced, these mxcalfile_pxx files will be lost. Therefore, they should be backed up
(saved on a USB drive) so that they can be restored. If using multiple disk drives (e.g. classified and general
usage), then these files must be replaced on each individual disk drive.
These files can be recreated by performing another receiver calibration adjustment.
Equipment Used for the Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model Part
Number
Power meter
E4418B/E4419B
E4418A/E4419A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm
E4413A
8485A
Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
83059B
85052-60012
RF Cable, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
85131C
85131E
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-15. Connect a GPIB cable between the network analyzer
and the power meter.
3-38
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 3-15
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
Setup 1 for the Receiver Calibration Adjustment
2. On the System menu, point to Service, Adjustments, and then click Receiver Calibration.
3. Ensure the GPIB settings are correct.
4. Click Calibrate, and then follow the instructions as they are displayed.
Figure 3-16
Setup 2 for the Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Service Guide N5230-90025
3-39
Tests and Adjustments
Adjustments
Figure 3-17
3-40
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Setup 3 for the Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Service Guide N5230-90025
4
Troubleshooting
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-1
Troubleshooting
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
The information in this chapter helps you:
•
Identify the portion of the analyzer at fault.
•
Locate the specific troubleshooting procedure to identify the assembly or peripheral at fault.
The sections in this chapter are arranged in a logical troubleshooting order. The following table lists the
sections and a brief summary of what to look for in that section.
Chapter Four at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
‘Getting Started with Troubleshooting’
A starting point to begin troubleshooting.
Page 4-4
‘Power Up Troubleshooting’
Power-up problems:
Page 4-6
•
•
•
Power supply problems
LCD problems
Bootup for the network analyzer interface
Problems occurring after the network analyzer
interface is loaded:
‘Front Panel Troubleshooting’
•
•
•
Does the display color appear correct?
Do the front panel keys function properly?
Does the front panel USB connector function
properly?
Page 4-12
Problems associated with the rear panel
interconnects.
‘Rear Panel Troubleshooting’
Page 4-17
The data found at these rear panel interconnects can
be used to troubleshoot the CPU board.
Problems with the measurement portion of the
analyzer.
‘Measurement System
Troubleshooting’
•
Checking the A, B, C, D, and R signals.
•
•
•
Checking the source group.
Checking the signal separation group.
Checking the receiver group.
Instrument Block Diagrams
Block diagrams for the analyzer including all options.
4-2
Page 4-23
Page 4-45
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Protect Against Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge can seriously damage your
analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the recommendations outlined
in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on page 1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.
Assembly Replacement Sequence
After identifying the problem requiring an assembly to be replaced, follow these steps:
Step 1. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 6, “Replaceable Parts.”
Step 2. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Repair and Replacement Procedures.”
Step 3. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Step 4. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-3
Troubleshooting
Getting Started with Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Getting Started with Troubleshooting
Where you begin troubleshooting depends upon the symptoms of the failure. Start by checking the basics as
outlined in the following section. Also review the flowchart in Figure 4-1 on page 4-5. You should then be
able to determine where in the troubleshooting procedure to begin, to locate the failed assembly.
Check the Basics
A problem can often be solved by repeating the procedure you were following when the problem occurred.
Before calling Agilent Technologies or returning the instrument for service, please perform the following
checks:
1. Is there power at the mains receptacle? If not, correct this situation and proceed.
2. Is the instrument turned on? Check to see if the front panel line switch glows. This indicates the power
supply is on. If the front panel line switch is on but the power supply does not appear to be on, go to
“Power Up Troubleshooting” on page 4-6.
3. Is the Windows® operating system running? If not, refer to “Operating System Recovery” in Chapter 8
for instructions.
4. If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with the instrument, make sure they are
clean, connected properly and operating correctly.
5. Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when the problem appeared. Are all the
settings correct? If not, correct them.
6. If the instrument is not functioning as expected, return the unit to a known state by pressing the Preset
key.
7. Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are expected, within the specifications and
capabilities of the instrument? Refer to the embedded help in the analyzer for instrument specifications.
8. If the problem is thought to be due to firmware, check to see if the instrument has the latest firmware
before starting the troubleshooting procedure. Refer to “Firmware Upgrades” in Chapter 8 for
instructions.
9. If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the operator’s check and system verification in
Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
4-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Getting Started with Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Organization
Follow the flowgraph in Figure 4-1 to help direct you to the correct section for troubleshooting the analyzer.
Figure 4-1
Troubleshooting Organization Flowchart
Go to “Power Up Troubleshooting”
on page 4-6.
Go to “Front Panel Troubleshooting”
on page 4-12.
Go to “Rear Panel Troubleshooting”
on page 4-17.
Go to “Measurement System
Troubleshooting” on page 4-23.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-5
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Power Up Troubleshooting
WARNING
Immediately unplug the instrument from the ac power line if the unit shows any of the
following symptoms:
•
Smoke, arcing, or unusual noise from inside the analyzer.
•
A circuit breaker or fuse on the main ac power line opens.
Check your network analyzer for evidence that it is powering up correctly. Perform the following steps and
make sure that the analyzer is displaying correct behavior as noted in the following steps.
Step 1. Disconnect all peripherals and plug in the network analyzer. Before the analyzer is powered on,
the line switch should glow yellow and no other lights should be on.
Step 2. Turn on the network analyzer.
•
The line switch should glow green.
•
The fans should be audible.
•
The display should flash and then show the hardware boot-up sequence. This process checks
the RAM and communication with the hard disk drive. These checks return an error message
if a problem is detected.
•
The Windows 2000 operating system should start.
•
The network analyzer measurement interface should open with an S11 measurement
displayed.
Step 3. If the analyzer powers up correctly, continue troubleshooting with “Front Panel Troubleshooting”
on page 4-12.
Step 4. If the analyzer does not power up correctly, follow these troubleshooting steps:
4-6
•
If the line switch does not glow or the fans are not operating (audible), go to “Power Supply
Check” on page 4-7.
•
If you cannot hear the fans operating, go to “If the Fans Are Not Operating” on page 4-11.
•
If the line switch glows green and the fans are operating (audible), but the display remains
dark, go to “Front Panel Troubleshooting” on page 4-12.
•
If the instrument appears to abort the network analyzer measurement interface process,
contact Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
Power Supply Check
NOTE
There are no fuses to replace within the power supply. If you determine that the power
supply is the failed assembly, replace the power supply.
A catastrophic failure in the power supply can be determined by observing the line switch:
1. Ensure that the instrument is plugged in with the power switch in the standby position (power not
switched on). Verify that the line switch glows yellow. A line switch that glows yellow indicates that
the +15 VDC line (P15 STB) is providing enough voltage to light the LED. (The actual voltage may not
be +15 VDC.)
2. Turn on the instrument power and verify that the line switch glows yellow. When the line switch
glows, it is an indication that the power supply has received an “ON” command and that the +5.2 VDC
supply can supply enough current to light, at least, these lamps.
If all of these supply voltages are missing, it is likely that the problem is either a defective A4 power supply,
or another assembly is loading down the A4 power supply. Continue with “If All Supply Voltages Are
Missing” on page 4-9, to determine the cause of the problem.
If the line switch is lit correctly the power supply has not suffered a catastrophic failure; however, the power
supply could still be at fault. Continue with the next section to measure the individual voltage supplies.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-7
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Measure the Individual Voltage Supplies
WARNING
The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the safety symbols
provided on the instrument and in “General Safety Considerations” on page 1-3 before
operating the unit with the cover removed. Make sure that the safety instructions are
strictly followed. Failure to do so can result in personal injury or loss of life.
To measure the power supply voltages, it is necessary to remove the instrument’s outer and inner covers.
Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6 for removal procedures. Use the E8356-60021 extender board to
measure the individual power supply voltages. Insert the extender board into an empty slot next to the A6
signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board.
NOTE
If any one individual voltage supply from the A4 power supply develops an over-voltage or
over-current problem, all supplies are affected. The supply goes into a “burp” mode
characterized by the supplies cycling on and off at a low voltage level. The cause of the
over-voltage or over-current condition can be the A4 power supply itself, or any assembly to
which the A4 power supply provides voltage. To isolate the cause of “burp” mode, continue
to the assembly removal process as described in the section titled “If All Supply Voltages
Are Missing” on page 4-9.
On the extender board, measure the power supply voltages using a digital multi-meter. Refer to Figure 4-2 for
the power supply test points on the extender board. Use the point marked “GND” for the ground connection.
Refer to Table 4-1 on page 4-9 for the correct voltages.
Figure 4-2
4-8
E8356-60021 Synthesizer/Reference Extender Measurement Points
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 4-1
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
Extender Board Measurement Points
Measurement
Location
Signal
Description
Test Equipment Useda
Expected Level
(Vdc)
Approximate
Resistance (W)
A
+5V power supply
DMM
+5.0
285
B
-15V power supply
DMM
15.0
12.7 k
C
-5V power supply
DMM
5.0
7.2 k
D
+9V power supply
DMM
+9.0
4.0 k
E
+15V power supply
DMM
+15.0
3.0 k
F
+15V power supply
DMM
+15.0
2.8 k
G
+22V power supply
DMM
+22.0
890
H
+32V power supply
DMM
+32.0
2.6 k
a. DMM = Digital multi-meter
If All Supply Voltages are Present
If all of the supplies have measured within tolerances, and the instrument still is not functioning properly,
refer to “Rear Panel Troubleshooting” on page 4-17.
If All Supply Voltages Are Missing
WARNING
Disconnect the line-power cord before removing any assembly. Procedures described in
this document may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective
covers are removed. Energy available at many points may, if contacted, result in personal
injury or loss of life.
You must sequentially remove all of the assemblies, taking care to disconnect the line power cord before
each removal, and then measure the supply voltages after each removal.
If the missing supply voltages return to a “power on” condition after removal of an assembly, suspect that
assembly as being defective.
Remove the network analyzer assemblies in the order specified in the following steps (refer to Chapter 7 for
removal instructions).
1. Unplug the test set motherboard cable from the A16 test set motherboard (refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard and the USB Hub” on page 7-28).
2. Unplug the front panel interface cable from the A3 front panel interface board (refer to “Replacing the
A3 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 7-12).
3. Remove the A5 SPAM board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on
page 7-16).
4. Remove the A6 multiplier board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on
page 7-16).
5. Remove the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-9
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Boards” on page 7-16).
6. Remove the A8 multiplier board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on
page 7-16).
7. Remove the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10
Boards” on page 7-16)
8. Remove the A10 frequency reference board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10
Boards” on page 7-16).
9. Unplug the A41 hard disk drive from the A15 CPU board (refer to “Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard
Disk Drive (HDD)” on page 7-46).
The minimum required assemblies to power up the analyzer are:
•
A4 power supply
•
A14 system motherboard
•
A15 CPU board
To further isolate the failure in the three remaining assemblies, measure the resistance on the extender
board (with the power turned off) from the power supply test points to “GND”. Refer to Figure 4-2 on
page 4-8 for the location of the measurement points. The resistances should be as shown in Table 4-1 on
page 4-9.
NOTE
Make sure that the only assemblies plugged in are the three minimum required assemblies
listed above.
Check for shorts (zero ) or very low resistance (approximately 1 ). If a short or low resistance is
measured, isolate each of the remaining three boards in the following order, and recheck the shorted test
point after each board is removed. Note that the resistance may be different from that listed in the table, but
you should be able to determine if the shorted condition has changed.
Isolate the remaining three assemblies:
•
remove the A15 CPU board
•
remove the A4 power supply
•
This leaves only the A14 system motherboard installed. If the measurements are still incorrect, this is
the suspected faulty assembly.
4-10
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Power Up Troubleshooting
If the Fans Are Not Operating
CAUTION
The power supply may be in thermal shutdown if the instrument has been operating without
the fans running. Allow the instrument to cool down before troubleshooting.
If all three fans are not operating, suspect a power supply problem or a defective A14 system motherboard.
Refer to “Power Supply Check” on page 4-7 to check the individual supplies. If the supplies are within
specifications, the most probable cause is a defective A14 system motherboard. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A14 System Motherboard” on page 7-22.
If only one or two fans are not functioning, and the power supplies are within specifications, suspect the
A14 system motherboard or a defective fan. Perform the following procedure.
1. Remove the front panel assembly from the instrument. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Front
Panel Assembly” on page 7-8.
2. Refer to Figure 4-3. Measure the fan voltages at J1, J3, and J4 on the A14 system motherboard.
Figure 4-3
Fan Voltages
3. If the correct voltage is present and the fan connector is in good mechanical condition, suspect a
defective fan. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan” on page 7-53.
If the voltage is not present, suspect a defective A14 system motherboard. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A14 System Motherboard” on page 7-22.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-11
Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Front Panel Troubleshooting
The front panel assembly consists of the A1 keypad, the A2 display assembly, the A3 front panel interface
board, the touchscreen and touchscreen controller board, the inverter board, and the USB board. The
following tests verify the operation of the front panel assembly when the analyzer is in the measurement
mode. If the instrument fails to power up correctly, or it is difficult to verify due to a faulty display, refer to
“Power Up Troubleshooting” on page 4-6.
Refer to the following sections to verify the operation of the noted assemblies.
•
“Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test” on page 4-13
•
“A2 Display Test” on page 4-15
•
“Checking the USB Board” on page 4-16
•
“A3 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 4-16
If all assemblies are working correctly, continue troubleshooting with “Rear Panel Troubleshooting” on
page 4-17.
4-12
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test
Test the front panel keypad by running the front panel test. To run the front panel test, perform the following:
Press UTILITY System , then Service , then More , then Front Panel Test
.
A Front Panel Key Test Utility dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4
Front Panel Key Test Utility Dialog Box
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-13
Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the Front Panel Keys
To check the front panel keys, push each key and compare the name in the Key Label box to the name
physically labeled on the key cap. These names are also in Table 4-2 below.
•
If all the key names are correct, then the front panel keypad is working. If some of the keys are not
working, suspect a faulty keypad. To replace the keypad, refer to “Replacing the A1 Keypad Assembly”
on page 7-12.
•
If none of the keys are working correctly, suspect a faulty A3 front panel interface board. To replace the
A3 front panel interface board, refer to “Replacing the A3 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 7-12.
Table 4-2
Front Panel Keyboard Key Names
TRACE/CHAN
Keys
RESPONSE
Keys
ENTRY
Keys
ENTRY
Keys (Cont’d)
Trace 1
Meas
OK
k/m
Trace 2
Format
Cancel
Enter
Off
Trace 3
Scale
Help
. (decimal point)
Trace 4
Display
Bk Sp
+/-
Traces
Avg
0
Channel
Cal
1
Freq
2
Power
Navigation
Keys
MARKER/
ANALYSIS Keys
STIMULUS
Keys

Marker
3
Sweep

Search
4
Trigger

Memory
5

Analysis
6
Save
7
Print
8
Macro
9
Recall
G/n
System
M/u
Preset
Click
4-14
UTILITY
Keys
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting
Checking the RPG (Front Panel Knob)
To check the RPG knob:
1. Press the UTILITY Preset key.
2. Rotate the knob and check for a fluid movement of numbers on the analyzer display.
•
If the movement of numbers is not smooth or no numbers appear at all, suspect a faulty A3 front panel
interface board. To replace the A3 front panel interface board, refer to “Replacing the A3 Front Panel
Interface Board” on page 7-12.
A2 Display Test
The display should be bright with all annotations and text readable. The display test allows you to check for
non-functioning pixels and other problems.
NOTE
If the display is dim or dark, refer to “Front Panel Troubleshooting” on page 4-12.
What Is a Damaged Pixel?
A pixel is a picture element that combines to create the image on the display. A pixel is about the size of a
small pin point.
A damaged pixel is:
•
A pixel that has a constant blue, green, or red appearance that will not change, or
•
a pixel that has a constant black appearance that will not change.
How to Run the Display Test
To run the display test, perform the following:
Press UTILITY System , then Service , then More , then Display Test .
A multi-color screen is displayed. Be prepared to look for the symptoms described in “How to Identify a
Faulty Display.” Follow the instructions on the screen.
How to Identify a Faulty Display
A display is considered faulty if:
•
More than 0.002% of the total pixels have a constant blue, green, red, or black appearance that will not
change.
•
Three or more consecutive pixels have a constant blue, green, red, or black appearance that will not
change.
•
If the A2 display assembly is determined to be faulty, replace it. Refer to “Replacing the A2 Display
Assembly” on page 7-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-15
Troubleshooting
Front Panel Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the USB Board
To verify proper operation of the USB board:
•
Connect a known good USB device, such as a USB mouse, to a front panel USB port.
•
Wait 15 seconds for the analyzer to verify the device connection, and then check the operation of the
USB device.
•
If the device performs correctly, the USB board is functioning properly.
•
If the device does not perform correctly, the USB board is faulty. Refer to “Replacing the USB Connector
Board” on page 7-12.
A3 Front Panel Interface Board
This assembly performs the following functions:
•
It routes USB signals between the front-panel USB connector and the A15 CPU board.
•
The speaker produces the audio output from signals supplied by the A15 CPU board.
•
It routes key pad commands from the keypad to the A15 CPU board.
•
It routes display signals from the A15 CPU board to the A2 display assembly.
Checking the Speaker
If no audio is heard:
•
Verify that the volume is set correctly and the proper sound driver is loaded; do the following:
— Press UTILITY System , then Configure , then Control Panel...
•
.
Click on the Sounds and Audio Devices entry. Follow the normal Windows procedure to check the sound
drivers and volume. If the audio is still not heard, suspect a faulty speaker located on the A3 front panel
interface board. Refer to “Replacing the A3 Front Panel Interface Board” on page 7-12.
Checking the Operation of the Key Pad Commands
To verify the key pad functionality, refer to “Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test” on page 4-13.
Checking the Display
To verify the display functionality, refer to “A2 Display Test” on page 4-15.
4-16
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Each rear panel connector is associated with a hardware group in the analyzer. You can use the data at these
rear panel connectors to help troubleshoot these hardware groups in addition to testing the connectors.
The connectors discussed in this section are:
•
USB
•
SERIAL (RS-232)
•
PARALLEL (1284-C)
•
VGA
•
GPIB
•
LAN
Checking the USB Ports
NOTE
The rear panel contains five USB ports; one “stand-alone USB port” on the CPU board and a
“group-of-four” connected to a separate hub.
To verify proper operation of any USB port:
•
Connect a known good USB device, such as a USB mouse.
•
Wait 15 seconds for the analyzer to verify the device connection, and then check the operation of the
USB device.
•
If the device performs correctly, the USB port is functioning properly.
•
If the device does not perform correctly, remove the non-working USB device, wait 15 seconds, and then
reconnect the device to the USB port.
•
If the device still does not perform correctly, remove the USB device and connect it to the front panel
USB.
NOTE
•
If the front panel USB port does not work, refer to “A3 Front Panel Interface Board” on
page 4-16.
If the USB device has been verified to work on the front panel but not on the stand-alone USB port:
— Then the A15 CPU board is faulty. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board” on
page 7-24.
•
If the USB device has been verified to work on the front panel but not on one of the “group-of-four” USB
ports:
— Then the rear panel hub is faulty. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard
and the USB Hub” on page 7-28 for replacing the rear panel hub board.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-17
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the SERIAL (RS-232), PARALLEL (1284-C), or VGA Port
To verify the proper operation of the SERIAL, PARALLEL, or VGA port:
•
Connect a known good serial, parallel, or VGA peripheral device.
•
Wait 15 seconds for the analyzer to verify the device connection, and then check the operation of the
peripheral device.
•
If the peripheral device performs correctly, the port is functioning properly.
•
If the peripheral device does not function properly, the A15 CPU board is faulty. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A15 CPU Board” on page 7-24.
Checking the GPIB Port
The network analyzer uses a National Instruments 488.2 GPIB controller and associated driver software.
This software includes a test utility that scans the GPIB bus and returns the status of all the connected
peripherals.
To run the test utility software and check the GPIB status:
1. Connect a known good peripheral to the analyzer using a known good GPIB cable.
2. On the System menu, point to Configure, and then click SCPI/GPIB. A SCPI/GPIB dialog box is displayed.
3. In the GPIB block, click System Controller to establish the analyzer as a controller. Wait for the analyzer to
configure, and then click OK.
4. On the System menu, click Windows Taskbar to open the Start Menu window.
5. On the Start Menu window, point to Programs, National Instruments NI-488.2, and then click Explore GPIB to
open the Measurement & Automation window.
6. On the left side of the Measurement & Automation window under folders:
a. Click the plus sign to expand the Measurement & Automation folder.
b. Click the plus sign to expand the Devices and Interfaces folder.
c. Right click GPIB0 (AT-GPIB/TNT) to open a submenu.
7. On the submenu, click Scan for Instruments to run the test.
8. The state of all the peripherals found on the bus is returned.
9. If problems are detected, check the connections of all GPIB cables, and check all the GPIB addresses of
the instruments on the bus.
NOTE
Address Information
•
Each device must have its own unique address.
•
The network analyzer’s default GPIB address in the controller mode is 21.
•
The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the analyzer (and
displayed).
Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its address.
4-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers
Passing the preceding test indicates that the analyzer's peripheral functions are operating normally.
Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external controller, check the following:
•
The GPIB interface hardware is incorrectly installed or not operational. (Refer to the embedded help in
your analyzer.)
•
The programming syntax is incorrect. (Refer to the embedded help in your analyzer.)
LAN Troubleshooting
Problems with the Local Area Network (LAN) can be difficult to solve. Software and protocol problems can
make it difficult to determine whether the analyzer's hardware is working properly, or if there is a problem
with the LAN or cabling.
The purpose of this section is to determine if the analyzer's hardware is functioning properly. While the
turn-on self-test verifies some LAN hardware functionality, it is limited to internal testing only. Incorrect IP
addresses will prevent proper operation. Improper subnet masks may allow only one-way communication,
while improper gateway addresses may exclude outside LAN access.
Ping Command
The analyzer has the built-in capability of performing a “ping” operation. Ping will request the analyzer to
send a few bytes of information to a specific LAN device. That device will then signal the analyzer that it has
received the information. The analyzer computes the approximate round trip time of the communication
cycle and displays it. For a full test of two-way communications, a ping test should be performed in two
directions.
•
First: you should ping from the analyzer to the local area network.
•
Second: you should ping from the local area network to the analyzer.
NOTE
In the second case, any other network device capable of sending a ping command could be
used, assuming it is connected to the same network. This could be a computer or even
another analyzer.
How to Ping from the Analyzer to the Local Area Network (LAN)
Follow the steps below to verify proper LAN operation (assuming you have a functioning LAN). If no network
LAN is available, see “Testing Between Two Analyzers” on page 4-21.
1. Make sure the IP address on the analyzer is set properly and that it is unique. If unsure how to check the
IP address, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer.
2. Make sure the subnet mask is 0.0.0.0. If not, note the current setting (to allow setting it back later) and
then set it to 0.0.0.0.
3. Find and note the IP address of another working LAN device on the same network. Make sure this device
is turned on, connected, and is functioning properly.
4. To ping the network device:
a. On the System menu, click Windows Taskbar.
b. On the Windows Taskbar menu, point to Programs, Accessories, and then click Command Prompt.
c. The command prompt window is displayed.
d. At the prompt, type ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx1 and press Enter on the front panel or keyboard. Refer to Step 5
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-19
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
for the results of a successful ping.
5. The analyzer attempts four cycles of communications with the indicated LAN device.
•
It displays the time it took to complete each cycle.
•
Each cycle times-out after one second if no communication is established and the message, Request
timed out, is displayed.
•
It is common for the first of the four cycles to time-out even though subsequent cycles pass.
•
See below for an example output of a successful ping.
C:>ping 141.121.69.162
Pinging 141.121.69.162 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 141.121.69.162: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127
Reply from 141.121.69.162: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127
Reply from 141.121.69.162: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127
Reply from 141.121.69.162: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=127
Ping statistics for 141.121.69.162:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, lost = 0 <0% loss>.
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
6. The above message verifies that one way communication from the analyzer to the network has been
established
7. If the subnet mask was changed in step 2, set it back at this time.
How to Ping from the Local Area Network (LAN) to the Analyzer
Reverse communication should also be verified. Determining this, though, is dependent upon your network
setup and software. Generally, you need to issue a ping command using the IP address of the analyzer to be
tested. For example, using Windows 95, 98, 2000 and while at a DOS prompt, type in ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx1.
Then press Enter on the front panel or keyboard. If full communication can be established, then the computer
display shows the cycle time for each of four cycle attempts (similar to that in step 5). Other software may
behave somewhat differently, but basically the same.
If the analyzer can talk to the network, but the network can not talk to the analyzer, then the computer or
device used from the network may have a subnet mask that excludes communication with the IP address
chosen for the analyzer. Any subnet mask other than 0.0.0.0 will exclude operation from some addresses.
Changing the subnet mask of a computer or other device should only be attempted by a qualified network
administrator. Failure to communicate due to a subnet mask incompatibility does not indicate any failure of
the analyzer.
If the analyzer fails to ping in either direction, and assuming the subnet masks are set properly, then the fault
must be isolated to the analyzer or to the network. Contact a qualified network administrator.
1. The letters x represent the IP address of the other device on the network.
1. The letters x represent the IP address of the analyzer.
4-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Testing Between Two Analyzers
The ability of the analyzer's LAN to function can be easily tested by connecting two analyzers together using
a “crossover cable” (a short length of cable with an RJ-45 connector on each end).
Some network hubs have the capability to make a crossover connection using two normal, or
straight-through, cables. If this capability is not available and a crossover cable is not available, a crossover
cable can be made by following the directions in “Constructing a Crossover Cable” on page 4-21.
Set the IP addresses on two analyzers. The addresses can be set to anything, but they must be different.
Make sure the subnet mask and gateway addresses are set to 0.0.0.0 and that the LAN is active on both
analyzers. Connect the two analyzers together using either a crossover cable or a crossover hub.
Now follow the steps in “How to Ping from the Analyzer to the Local Area Network (LAN)” on page 4-19 to
have the first analyzer ping the second analyzer. When done, repeat the procedure having the second
analyzer ping the first. If both procedures function properly, the LAN circuitry on both analyzers is verified.
If neither function properly:
•
One or both IP addresses could be wrong.
•
One or both LAN states could be set to off.
•
The crossover cable could be miswired.
•
One or both analyzers could be defective.
If possible, eliminate the possibility of a defective analyzer by substitution of a known working unit. Once the
analyzer has been proven to be working properly, concentration can be placed on the network itself to
determine the cause of the failure.
Constructing a Crossover Cable
A crossover cable can be made from a standard LAN cable by connecting pin 1 from each connector to pin 3
of the other connector, and pin 2 from each connector to pin 6 of the other connector.
1. Strip away a few inches of the outside jacket insulation from the middle of a standard LAN cable that has
an RJ-45 connector on each end.
NOTE
Pins 1, 2, 3, and 6 of the connectors must be located to determine which wires to cut in the
following steps. Most, but not all, LAN cables use the color coding listed in Table 4-3. If your
cable does not use this color scheme, you will have to determine the locations of the
appropriate wires before proceeding with this procedure.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-21
Troubleshooting
Rear Panel Troubleshooting
Table 4-3
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
LAN Pin Definitions and Wire Color Codes
Pin Number
Color
Pin Number
Color
1 (transmit +)
White/orange
5
White/blue
2 (transmit )
Orange
6 (receive )
Green
3 (receive +)
White/green
7
White/brown
4
Blue
8
Brown
2. Cut the wires going to pins 1, 2, 3, and 6. Strip away a small amount of insulation from each of the eight
cut ends.
a. Connect the wire from pin 1 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 3 on the other end of the
cable.
b. Connect the wire from pin 3 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 1 on the other end of the
cable.
c. Connect the wire from pin 2 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 6 on the
other end of the cable.
d. Connect the wire from pin 6 on one end of the cable to the wire from pin 2 on the
other end of the cable.
3. Insulate all exposed wires so that they cannot short together.
4. Label this as a crossover cable so that it cannot be confused with a standard cable.
Figure 4-5
4-22
Construction of a Crossover Cable
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
This section provides troubleshooting procedures for the measurement portion of the PNA. In this section,
the analyzer is used as a tool to help isolate the suspected faulty functional group. Once the faulty functional
group is determined, troubleshooting steps are provided to help you isolate the faulty assembly or part.
Before you begin—consider: Where do you see a problem?
If you are seeing a problem at Preset, perform the standard S-parameter test set troubleshooting procedure,
starting with: “Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard S-Parameter Mode)” on page 4-26.
You should also consider the problem indications that are observed and whether the observed condition is a
soft failure or a hard failure.
Soft Failure
With a soft failure, the network analyzer's performance has degraded to an unacceptable level, yet it
continues to operate and displays no error messages. For this type of failure, performance tests must be
conducted to isolate the problem. Begin with viewing the error terms as described in “Error Terms” in
Chapter 8 This will help to isolate most problems. If additional tests are required, refer to “Performance
Tests (Agilent N7840A Software Package)” on page 3-28.
Hard Failure
With a hard failure, the PNA does not perform well and displays one or more error messages. To diagnose
and repair a hard failure:
•
Check “Help About” to verify that the model number and options listed match the actual analyzer model
and options.
•
Check “EEPROM Headers” to verify that the data there is correct.
•
Check error messages. Refer to “Error Messages” and follow the suggestions outlined there for each
applicable error message.
Help About
Go to the Help About screen by selecting Help, About Network Analyzer in the network analyzer application.
Verify that the information displayed in this screen is correct for your analyzer. If any of the information is
incorrect, contact Agilent Technologies. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-23
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
EEPROM Headers
The network analyzer application uses the firmware revision information stored in the pc board header
EEPROM. If the information stored in any EEPROM is incorrect, the network analyzer may not operate
properly.
The following table lists the pc boards in your network analyzer that contain EEPROM headers. The pc
boards are listed by name and part number and the correct firmware revision code is given for each.
PC Board Part
Number
Memory ID
Hardware
ID
Firmware
Revision
A5 SPAM
E8364-63187
3
5
A
A6 and A8 multiplier
A12 multiplier (Options 146 and 246)
E8364-63182
3
9
A
A7 and A9 fractional-N synthesizer
A13 fractional-N synthesizer (Options 146 and 246)
E8364-63189
3
8
C
A10 frequency reference
E8364-60136
3
10
B
A16 test set motherboard
N5230-63078
3
16
D
A17 QABC board
N5230-63085
3
46
A
PC Board Name
To view this EEPROM header information on the network analyzer display, select System, Service, Utilities,
View EEPROM Headers in the network analyzer application. Refer to Figure 4-6.
If the information is incorrect for any of the pc boards, contact Agilent Technologies. Refer to “Contacting
Agilent” on page 2-11.
Figure 4-6
4-24
EEPROM Header Info Dialog Window
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Error Messages
SOURCE UNLEVELED: The source ALC circuit on the A16 test set motherboard is running open-loop. Check
the cable connections for W31 and W32 between the A19 MASSQuad and the A16 test set motherboard.
UNLEVELED, SOURCE 1: (Options 146 and 246) The source ALC circuit on the A16 test set motherboard is
running open-loop. Check the cable connections for W31 and W32 between the A19 MASSQuad and the
A16 test set motherboard.
UNLEVELED, SOURCE 2: (Options 146 and 246) The source 2 ALC circuit on the A17 QABC board is running
open-loop. Check the cable connections for W74 and W75 between the A18 MASSQuad and the A17 QABC
board.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-25
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Verifying the A, B, C, D, and R Traces (Standard S-Parameter Mode)
NOTE
There is no way to view the frequency offset receiver response (Option 080). However, some
standard S-parameter receiver trace information is helpful in troubleshooting the frequency
offset section of the PNA. It is therefore recommended that you run this test even if you only
suspect the frequency offset section of malfunctioning.
The first step is to verify that the A, B,C, D, and R traces are present and that they are approximately level:
•
Connect an Open or Short standard from a mechanical calibration kit to each test port (use adapters if
necessary).
•
On the System menu, point to Service, Utilities, and then click Receiver Display.
•
For all analyzers except those with Options 146 and 246, traces A, B, C, D, and R are displayed in five
separate data windows as shown in Figure 4-7. Identifying discrepancies of the traces in these windows
can help you to isolate the faulty assembly.
Figure 4-7
4-26
Typical Five Channel Display
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
•
For analyzers with Options 146 and 246, traces A, B, C, D, R1, and R3 are displayed in six separate data
windows as shown in Figure 4-8. Identifying discrepancies of the traces in these windows can help you
to isolate the faulty assembly.
Figure 4-8
•
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Typical Six Channel Display for Options 146 and 246
If all traces are present and are similar to the traces in Figure 4-7 or Figure 4-8, then there are no major
problems with the analyzer’s measurement system. There may, however, be a minor failure in the
analyzer.
To test further:
— Go to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments” and perform all the tests in that section.
— If a problem still exists, contact Agilent. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
•
If any of the traces are not present, are noisy or distorted, or are at an incorrect level, then there is a
problem with the analyzer’s measurement system. Proceed to “Where to Begin Troubleshooting.”
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-27
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Where to Begin Troubleshooting
For the purposes of troubleshooting, the analyzer block diagram is divided into the following functional
groups:
•
the source group
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
the signal separation group
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
A6, A8, and A12 (Options 146 and 246 only) multipliers
A7, A9, and A13 (Options 146 and 246 only) fractional-N synthesizers
A10 frequency reference
A16 test set motherboard
A17 QABC board (Options 146 and 246 only)
A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) (Options 146 and 246 only)
A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) (Options 146 and 246 only)
A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
A21, A22, A23, and A24 test port couplers
A25 60-dB step attenuator (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246 only)
A26 60-dB step attenuator (Options 146 and 246 only)
Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4, and A, B, C, D, and R ports
the receiver group
— A5 SPAM board
— A20 mixer brick
— A29 reference channel switch (Options 146 and 246 only)
Use the list on the following pages to help you determine in which analyzer functional group to begin
troubleshooting.
This is by no means an exhaustive list of possible symptoms nor possible failures. It is recommended that
you view the system block diagram, at the end of this chapter, as you review the entries in this list and
perform any of the troubleshooting procedures listed.
Good judgement and established logical troubleshooting techniques must be used to complement the
procedures contained in this section.
Refer to Table 4-4 on page 4-33 for a list of the frequencies associated with each of the network analyzer’s
13 or 17 bands.
4-28
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
All Traces
•
If all traces are missing in all bands, the problem is most likely in the source group. However, a missing
or disabled DSP driver may exhibit the same or similar symptoms. To verify that this DSP driver is present
and enabled:
1. Click My Computer, Properties, Hardware tab, Device Manager. Expand Agilent PNA DSP Device. The
following entry should be listed: Agilent Technologies DSP Driver #2 and should be enabled.
2. If the icon to the left of the name is a yellow box containing an exclamation mark (!), use Windows
Explorer to verify the presence of the following file: C:\WINNT\system32\drivers\spampnp.sys.
3. If you have verified that the DSP driver is present and enabled, but all traces are still missing in all
bands, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-30.
•
If the trace faults are band-related, the problem is in the source group. Using Table 4-4 on page 4-33,
note the frequency bands in which problems are seen. Go to “Source Group Tests” on page 4-30 and
perform the band-specific tests that correspond to the bands in which the problems are seen.
R Trace Only
A problem that affects only the R trace is isolated to the A20 mixer brick or the A5 SPAM board. For
analyzers with Options 146 or 246, the problem is additionally isolated to the A29 reference channel switch
and accompanying limiter and DC block. Go to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42.
A Trace Only
If the trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
B Trace Only
If the trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
C Trace Only
If the trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
D Trace Only
If the trace is missing in all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
A, B, and R1 Traces Only (Options 146 and 246)
The problem is in the source (1) group, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-30. If the trace is missing in
all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
C, D, and R3 Traces Only (Options 146 and 246)
The problem is in the source 2 group, go to “Checking the Source Group” on page 4-30. If the trace is missing in
all bands, go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-29
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the Source Group
Source Group Tests
Equipment Used for These Tests
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model or
Part Number
Spectrum analyzer
8565E
None
Power meter
E4418B/19B
E4418A/19A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm
8485A
None
RF cable, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
85131C
Any
Getting Ready to Test
Before checking the assemblies, you must open the analyzer.
CAUTION
Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to reduce the chance of electrostatic
discharge for all of the procedures in this chapter.
1. Turn off the analyzer power.
2. Unplug the power to the analyzer and disconnect all rear panel connections.
3. Remove the covers from the analyzer. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
WARNING
Procedures described in this document are performed with power supplied to the product
while protective covers are removed. Energy available at many points may, if contacted,
result in personal injury.
4. With the covers off, plug in the analyzer and turn on the power.
Single vs. Broadband Failure
There are two main types of failures that are related to the source group. The failures are classified as:
•
broadband
•
single band
Single band failures are indicated by all four channel traces (or A and B or C and D traces for Options 146 and
246) having partial dropouts across the frequency range or intermittent phase lock problems.
Troubleshooting information is provided under “If the trace faults are band-related,” under “All Traces” on
page 4-29.
Broadband failures are indicated by all four channel traces (or A and B or C and D traces for Options 146 and
246) being in the noise floor. Most often this is due to problems in the phase lock signal path and will be
characterized by a “PHASE LOCK LOST” error message on the display.
4-30
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
A phase lock problem is due to either:
•
faulty RF signal generation (caused by the A10, A9, A8, or A19 board or by the A13, A12, or A18 board for
Options 146 and 246)
•
faulty LO signal generation (caused by the A10, A7 or A6 board)
RF Signal Troubleshooting
To isolate a broadband RF signal generation failure, check the test port output power:
1. Connect a power meter and power sensor to Port 1 of the analyzer.
2. On the analyzer, press Preset, set the Center Frequency to 2 GHz, and the Frequency Span to 0 Hz. Note the
power reading displayed on the power meter.
NOTE
In the unlocked state, the analyzer will “search” for the reference signal. The output power,
as indicated on the power meter, should be at least 8 dBm.
3. Connect the power sensor, in turn, to Ports 2, 3, and 4 and set trace to measure S22, S33, and S44
respectively. Note the power reading displayed on the power meter.
If the power level is low or high on only one of the test ports, the problem is in the signal separation group.
Go to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
Checking the A10 5 MHz Reference Output, All Bands
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate flexible cable W30 (W70 for Option 146 or 246), at the A10 frequency reference board.
2. Disconnect W30 (W70 for Option 146 or 246) from A10J10.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A10J10.
4. The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 5 MHz.
5. If the 5 MHz signal is not present, replace the A10 frequency reference board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the 5 MHz signal is present, reconnect cable W30 (W70 for Option 146 or 246), and then continue
testing at “Checking the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 0 through 3” on page 4-31.
Checking the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 0 through 3
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 0 through in all receivers.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate the flexible cable W2, at the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board.
2. Disconnect W2 from A7J101.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A7J101.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 500 MHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 507.66 MHz.
5. If the signal is not present and the 5 MHz reference signal is present from “Checking the A10 5 MHz
Reference Output, All Bands,” replace the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-31
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W2, and then continue with “Checking the A7 Fractional-N
Synthesizer Output, Band 4” on page 4-32.
Checking the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Band 4
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in band 4 in all receivers.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the back of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate semirigid cable W1, at the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable. Some flexing of the cables is
necessary to measure the output. Do not over bend them.
2. Using a 5/16 inch torque wrench, disconnect W1 at A7J106.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A7J106.
4. Set the network analyzer to a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 1 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If this signal is not present, replace the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the signal is present, leave the spectrum analyzer connected to A7J106 and continue with “Checking
the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17” on page 4-33.
4-32
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Checking the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 5 through 17 in all receivers.
1. Set the network analyzer to measure a CW frequency of 2 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
2. If the signal is not present, replace the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
3. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W1, and then continue with “Checking the A6 Multiplier Output,
All Bands” on page 4-34.
Table 4-4
Options
140,
145,
146,
240,
245,
or
246
240,
245,
or
246
LO Path Frequencies
Band
Network Analyzer
Frequency Band
of Problem
(GHz)
Network Analyzer
Source Frequency
Setting
(GHz)
Expected A7
Output
Frequency
(GHz)
Expected A6
Output
Frequency
(GHz)
0
0.0003 to 0.001
0.0007
0.00836
0.00836
1
0.001 to 0.010
0.005
0.01266
0.01266
2
0.010 to 0.040
0.025
0.03266
0.03266
3
0.040 to 0.748
0.060
0.06766
0.06766
4
0.748 to 1.500
1.100
1.10766
1.10766
5
1.500 to 3.125
2.200
2.20766
2.20766
6
3.125 to 4.167
3.600
1.80383
3.60766
7
4.167 to 5.250
4.600
2.30383
4.60766
8
5.250 to 6.250
5.700
2.85383
5.70766
9
6.250 to 8.333
6.700
1.67692
6.70766
10
8.333 to 9.800
9.000
2.25192
9.00766
11
9.800 to 10.500
10.200
2.55192
10.20766
12
10.500 to 12.500
11.500
1.91794
3.83588
13*
12.500 to 13.500
13.000
2.17050
4.34099
13**
12.500 to 15.000
13.700
2.28461
4.56922
14
15.000 to 15.750
15.400
2.56794
5.13588
15
15.750 to 16.667
16.200
2.70128
5.40255
16
16.667 to 18.750
17.700
2.95128
5.90255
17
18.750 to 20.000
19.300
1.60897
6.43588
* Applies to 13.5 GHz analyzers only.
** Applies to 20 GHz analyzers only.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-33
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the A6 Multiplier Output, All Bands
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in all bands in all receivers.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate the flexible cable W3, at the A6 multiplier board.
2. Disconnect W2 from the A6 board.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 2 GHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If the signal is not present and the signals are present from “Checking the A7 Fractional-N Synthesizer
Output, Bands 5 through 17,” replace the A6 multiplier board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5
through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W3, and then continue with “Checking the A9 Fractional-N
Synthesizer Output, Bands 0 through 3” on page 4-34.
Checking the A9 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 0 through 3
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 0 through 3 in all receivers, or in the A and B
receivers for Options 146 and 246.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate the flexible cable W5, at the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board.
2. Disconnect W5 from A9J101.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A9J101.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 500 MHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 507.66 MHz.
5. If the signal is not present and the 5 MHz reference signal is present from “Checking the A10 5 MHz
Reference Output, All Bands,” replace the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W5, and then continue with “Checking the A9 Fractional-N
Synthesizer Output, Band 4” on page 4-34.
Checking the A9 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Band 4
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in band 4 in all receivers, or in the A and B receivers for
Options 146 and 246.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the back of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate semirigid cable W4, at the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board.
4-34
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
CAUTION
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable. Some flexing of the cables is
necessary to measure the output.
2. Using a 5/16 inch torque wrench, disconnect W4 at A9J106.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A9J106.
4. Set the network analyzer to a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 1 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If this signal is not present, replace the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the signal is present, leave the spectrum analyzer connected to A9J106 and continue with “Checking the
A9 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17” on page 4-35.
Checking the A9 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 5 through 17 in all receivers, or in the A and B
receivers for Options 146 and 246.
1. Set the network analyzer to a CW frequency of 2 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
2. If the signal is not present, replace the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
3. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W4, and then continue with “Checking the A8 Multiplier Output,
All Bands” on page 4-35.
Checking the A8 Multiplier Output, All Bands
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in all bands in all receivers, or in the A and B receivers for
Options 146 and 246.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-14. Locate the flexible cable W6, at the A8 multiplier board.
2. Disconnect W6 from the A8 board.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector.
4. Set the network analyzer for a 2 GHz CW frequency and observe the spectrum analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If the signal is not present and the signals are present from “Checking the A9 Fractional-N Synthesizer
Output, Bands 5 through 17,” replace the A8 multiplier board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5
through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W6, and then continue with “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
Checking the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 0 through 3 (Options 146 and 246)
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 0 through 3 in the C and D receivers.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-35
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)”
on page 6-20. Locate the flexible cable W62, at the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board.
2. Disconnect W62 from A13J101.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A13J101.
4. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement at a CW frequency if 500 MHz and observe the
spectrum analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 507.66 MHz.
5. If the signal is not present and the 5 MHz reference signal is present from “Checking the A10 5 MHz
Reference Output, All Bands,” replace the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W62, and then continue with “Checking the A13 Fractional-N
Synthesizer Output, Band 4 (Options 146 and 246)” on page 4-36.
Checking the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Band 4 (Options 146 and 246)
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in band 4 in the C and D receivers.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the back of this chapter and to “Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)”
on page 6-20. Locate semirigid cable W61, at the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cable. Some flexing of the cables is
necessary to measure the output.
2. Using a 5/16 inch torque wrench, disconnect W61 at A13J106.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to A13J106.
4. Set the network analyzer to an S33 measurement at a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 1 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If this signal is not present, replace the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
6. If the signal is present, leave the spectrum analyzer connected to A13J106 and continue with “Checking
the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17 (Options 146 and 246)” on page 4-37.
4-36
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Checking the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Output, Bands 5 through 17 (Options 146 and 246)
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in bands 5 through 17 in the C and D receivers.
1. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement at a CW frequency of 2 GHz.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
2. If the signal is not present, replace the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
3. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W61, and then continue with “Checking the A12 Multiplier
Output, All Bands (Options 146 and 246)” on page 4-37.
Checking the A12 Multiplier Output, All Bands (Options 146 and 246)
Perform this procedure if you observe a problem in all bands in the C and D receivers.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)”
on page 6-20. Locate the flexible cable W63, at the A12 multiplier board.
2. Disconnect W63 from the A12 board.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector.
4. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement at a CW frequency of 2 GHz and observe the spectrum
analyzer measurement.
•
The spectrum analyzer should measure a signal at 2 GHz (plus the 7.66 MHz offset).
5. If the signal is not present and the signals are present from “Checking the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer
Output, Bands 5 through 17 (Options 146 and 246),” replace the A12 multiplier board. Refer to “Removing
and Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
6. If the signal is present, reconnect cable W63, and then continue with “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-37
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the Signal Separation Group
Before checking the signal separation group, perform the following procedures:
•
“Getting Ready to Test” on page 4-30
Checking the Output Power of the A, B, C, and D Signals
Using a power meter, you can measure the outputs of the A, B, C, and D signals from the front panel. The
measurement results will help you isolate a faulty assembly. The output of the R channel cannot be
measured because it would necessitate breaking the phase lock loop, causing all of the signals to be lost.
Equipment Used for These Tests
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model or
Part Number
Power meter
E4418B/E441B
E4418A/E4419A
Power sensor, 3.5 mm
E8485A
None
Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
83059B
85052-60012
Equipment Setup
1. Before starting these checks, zero and calibrate the power meter. (See the power meter user’s guide for
instructions on setting the calibration factor.)
2. If the Receiver Display (Figure 4-7 or Figure 4-8) is not on the analyzer screen, perform the following: On
the System menu, point to Service, Utilities, and then click Receiver Display.
3. Set the sweep speed for a 10 second sweep: On the Sweep menu, click Sweep Time and set the time to
10.000 seconds in the Sweep Time box.
Checking Port 1, 2, 3, or 4 Power Outputs (A, B, C, or D Signals)
The object of this check is to verify the power of the output signal across the entire frequency range.
Perform this test if there is an observed problem only with one channel trace. The ten second sweep is slow
enough to allow you to observe the output power on the power meter as the sweep occurs.
1. Connect the power sensor to the suspect port.
2. Observe the power reading on the power meter as the sweep occurs on the analyzer.
3. The measured output power on the power meter should be at least –8 dBm over the entire frequency
range.
•
If the measured power is correct, go to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42.
•
If the measured power is not correct, go to “Checking the Signal through the Signal Separation Path”
on page 4-39.
4-38
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
Checking the Signal through the Signal Separation Path
For all of the following checks, refer to the block diagrams at the end of this chapter and to:
•
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240” on page 6-22
•
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on page 6-30
Trace loss in the signal separation group is due to one or more of the following assemblies being defective:
•
A18 MASSQuad (Options 146 and 246 only)
•
A19 MASSQuad
•
A25 source step attenuator (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246 only)
•
A26 source step attenuator (Options 146 and 246 only)
•
A21, A22, A23, or A24 test port coupler
Equipment Used for These Tests
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model or Part
Number
Spectrum analyzer
8565E
856xEa
a. Must be capable of measuring a signal at 1 GHz.
To determine which assembly is defective, check the signal at each available measurement point in the
signal path from the switch splitter in the A19 MASSQuad (and A18 MASSQuad for Options 146 and 246) to
the output port.
For Port 1 measurements, set the network analyzer for an S11 measurement with a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
For Port 2, 3, and 4 measurements, set the network analyzer for an S22, S33, or S44, measurement with a CW
frequency of 1 GHz.
Perform the following checks in the order presented.
Checking the A19 MASSQuad A18 MASSQuad and the A21–A24 Test Port Couplers
1. Locate the following semirigid cable at the appropriate output of the either the A19 or A18 MASSQuad:
•
Analyzers with Options 140 and 240
— Port 1; W8 of A19
— Port 2; W9 of A19
— Port 3; W10 of A19
— Port 4; W11 or A19
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-39
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
•
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Analyzers with Options 145 and 245
— Port; W40 of A19
— Port 2; W41 of A19
— Port 3; W42 of A19
— Port 4; W43 of A19
•
Analyzers with Options 146 and 246
— Port 1; W40 of A19
— Port 2; W41 of A19
— Port 3; W64 of A18
— Port 4; W65 of A18
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the MASSQuad.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the open connector. Set the spectrum analyzer to measure a signal at
1 GHz.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present and the analyzer has a source step attenuator, reconnect the cable to
the MASSQuad and continue testing at “Checking the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator (Options 145,
245, 146, and 246)” on page 4-40 or “Checking the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator (Options 146 and
246)” on page 4-41, whichever is appropriate.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is not present and the analyzer does not have a source step attenuator, replace the
MASSQuad Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad
Mounting Block” on page 7-34 or “Removing and Replacing the A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)” on
page 7-32, whichever is appropriate.
6. If the 1 GHz signal is present, reconnect the cable to the MASSQuad and replace the appropriate test
port coupler. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and
Coupler Mounting Blocks” on page 7-38.
Checking the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246)
1. Locate semirigid cable W59 at the output of the A25 source step attenuator.
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the A25 step attenuator.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A25 step attenuator connector. Set the spectrum analyzer to
measure a signal at 1 GHz.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, continue troubleshooting at “Checking the Output of the A19
MASSQuad to the A25 Source Step Attenuator (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246)” on page 4-40.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the A19 MASSQuad. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A19
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block” on page 7-34.
Checking the Output of the A19 MASSQuad to the A25 Source Step Attenuator (Options 145, 245, 146, and
246)
1. Locate semirigid cable W58 at the output of the A19 MASSQuad that goes to the input of the A25 source
step attenuator.
4-40
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the A19 MASSQuad.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A19 MASSQuad connector. Set the spectrum analyzer to measure
a signal at 1 GHz.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, replace the A19 MASSQuad. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the
A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block” on page 7-34.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the A25 step attenuator. Refer to.“Removing and Replacing the A25
60-dB Source Step Attenuator” on page 7-40.
Checking the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator (Options 146 and 246)
1. Locate semirigid cable W79 at the output of the A26 source step attenuator.
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the A26 step attenuator.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A26 step attenuator connector. Set the spectrum analyzer to
measure a signal at 1 GHz. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, continue troubleshooting at “Checking the Output of the A18
MASSQuad to the A26 Source Step Attenuator (Options 146 and 246)” on page 4-41.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the A18 MASSQuad. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A18
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)” on page 7-32.
Checking the Output of the A18 MASSQuad to the A26 Source Step Attenuator (Options 146 and 246)
1. Locate semirigid cable W78 at the output of the A18 MASSQuad that goes to the input of the A26 source
step attenuator.
2. Using a 5/16-inch torque wrench, disconnect the semirigid cable at the A18 MASSQuad.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A18 MASSQuad connector. Set the spectrum analyzer to measure
a signal at 1 GHz. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement.
4. If the 1 GHz signal is not present, replace the A18 MASSQuad. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the
A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)” on page 7-32.
5. If the 1 GHz signal is present, replace the A26 step attenuator. Refer to.“Removing and Replacing the A26
60-dB Source Step Attenuator” on page 7-42.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-41
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Checking the Receiver Group
Equipment Used for These Tests
Equipment Type
Model or
Part Number
Alternate Model or Part
Number
Spectrum analyzer
8565E
856xEa
a. Must be capable of measuring a signal at 7.66 MHz.
Getting Ready to Test
Before checking the assemblies, you must open the analyzer.
CAUTION
Use an antistatic work surface and wrist strap to reduce the chance of electrostatic
discharge for all of the procedures in this chapter.
1. Turn off the analyzer power.
2. Unplug the power to the analyzer and disconnect all rear panel connections.
3. Remove the covers from the analyzer. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
4. With the covers off, plug in the analyzer and turn on the power.
5. For Port 1 measurements, set the network analyzer for an S11 measurement with a CW frequency of 1
GHz.
For Port 2, 3, or 4 measurements, set the network analyzer for an S22, S33, or S44 measurement with a CW
frequency of 1 GHz.
Checking the A20 Mixer Brick Receiver Outputs
Perform this procedure if a problem appears to be in one of the receiver channels.
1. Refer to the block diagram at the end of this chapter and to “Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240”
on page 6-22. Locate the flexible cables W21, W22, W23, W24, and W25 at each receiver channel
IF output, A, B, C, D, and R respectively.
2. Disconnect the flexible cable at the suspect channel.
3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the suspect channel connector.
4. Make sure that the analyzer’s spur avoidance feature is OFF and that all front-panel jumpers are installed. The
measured signal on the spectrum analyzer should be at 7.66 MHz.
•
If the measured signal is present, replace the A5 SPAM board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the
A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
5. If the measured signal is not present on the R channel and the analyzer is equipped with Option 146 or
246, continue troubleshooting at “Checking the A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block
(Options 146 and 246 Only)” on page 4-43.
If the measured signal is not present on the A, B, C, or D channels and the analyzer is equipped with
Option 146 or 246, replace the A20 mixer brick. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick
(QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
4-42
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
If the measured signal is not present on any of the channels and the analyzer is not equipped with Option
146 or 246, replace the A20 mixer brick. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick
(QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
Checking the A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246 Only)
1. Set the network analyzer for an S11 measurement with a CW frequency of 1 GHz.
2. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the front-panel Reference Source Out connector.
3. If the measured signal is present, continue with step 5.
4. If the measured signal is not present replace the A29 reference channel switch, the limiter, or the DC
block. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block” on
page 7-44.
5. Set the network analyzer for an S33 measurement.
6. If the measured signal is present, replace the A20 mixer brick. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A20
Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)” on page 7-36.
7. If the measured signal is not present replace the A29 reference channel switch, the limiter, or the DC
block. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block” on
page 7-44.
Service Guide N5230-90025
4-43
Troubleshooting
Measurement System Troubleshooting
4-44
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
REAR PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
N5230C PNA-L Overall Block Diagram
4-Port, 300 kHz to 13.5 GHz and 20 GHz
Options 140 and 240
Service Guide: N5230-90024
A1
KEYPAD
RPG
INVERTER
A2
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
CONTROL
A3 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
VGA
VGA
INTERFACE
PCI BUS
PCI BUS
W13
7.66 MHz *
I
W23
J4
W14
7.66 MHz*
I
C
C
15 MHz
VIDEO PROCESSOR
R
B
W24
J5
ADC
RAM
VIDEO RAM
D
D
15 MHz
A41 HARD
DISK DRIVE
20.0 MHz
W15
W16
5 MHz
I
J3
R
D
20.0 MHz
W12
7.66 MHz*
I
TO A6, A7, A8, A9, A16
A10 FREQUENCY REFERENCE
L
R
R
* With spur avoidance OFF.
HIGH DENSITY DATA BUS
211
200 Hz
With spur avoidance ON, for
frequencies below 40 MHz, the
IF frequency is set to various
values between 1 and 12 MHz
to avoid generating spurs.
POWER BUS
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
J2
2nd LO HB
100 MHz
215
10
ƒ
10 MHz
HIGH STAB
OCXO
L
DITHER
NOISE
X8
A4
POWER
SUPPLY
10 MHz
C
20.0 MHz
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
LINE IN
R
R
R
POWER BUS
USB
INTERFACE
L
W25
J6
A14 SYSTEM MOTHERBOARD
I
7.66 MHz*
EXT REF IN
10 MHz
L
DSP
ADC
W26
A
20.0 MHz
15 MHz
ADC
7.66 MHz*
USB x 4
R
B
B
PCI
BRIDGE
RAM
L
W22
J2
ADC
MAIN
CPU
ROM
10/100 BASE-T
ETHERNET
20.0 MHz
A
A
15 MHz
EEPROM
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE
LAN
W21
J1
ADC
SPEAKER
PARALLEL PORT
INTERFACE
GPIB
A20 MIXER BRICK (QuintBrick)
M ICRO CONTROLLER
RS-232 PORT
INTERFACE
PARALLEL
A5 SIGNAL PROCESSING
ADC MODULE (SPAM)
15 MHz
USB
INTERFACE
RS-232
USB x 2
USB
HUB
A15 CPU
USB
USB
BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN
& CONTROLLER
J4
P. LOCK
REF
J5
MIXED POWER AND CONTROL SIGNALS
N/C
SERIAL TEST BUS NODES
It is recommended that troubleshooting
be done with spur avoidance OFF to
ensure a fixed IF frequency.
Bx = ACTIVE SOURCE BAND
N/C
DAC
5 MHz
REF
5 MHz
10 MHz
W27
EXT REF OUT
10 MHz
2
W28
J12
J3
W29
FROM
A16
J10
W30
J11
Band
0
1
Mixer
Brick
L.O.
Harmonic
Number
(N)
1
2
3
4
5
A7 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A6
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A9/A13 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A8/A12
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A19/A18
MASS
Frequency
(GHz)
1
0.008 to 0.009
0.008 to 0.009
.0003 to 0.001
.0003 to 0.001
1
0.009 to 0.018
0.009 to 0.018
0.001 to 0.010
0.001 to 0.010
.0003 to 0.001
B5-17
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
0.001 to 0.010
3
1
1
0.018 to 0.048
0.048 to 0.756
0.018 to 0.048
0.048 to 0.756
0.010 to 0.040
0.040 to 0.748
0.010 to 0.040
0.040 to 0.748
FRAC-N
LOGIC
5 MHz REF
4
5
1
1
0.756 to 1.508
1.508 to 3.133
0.756 to 1.508
1.508 to 3.133
0.748 to 1.500
1.500 to 3.125
0.748 to 1.500
1.500 to 3.125
B0-3
J101
J105
0.748 to 1.500
2250 MHz
VCO 417
415
W1
J100
B0-5
B4-17
J106
B0-3
0.040 to 0.748
1211
1214
B4-17
2
A16 TEST SET MOTHERBOARD
1213
416
1.5 GHz
0.010 to 0.040
1215
POWER
DAC
1
ALC
3.2 GHz
B4
2
A6 MULTIPLIER
A7 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
W2
715
+5V REF
B0-8,12-16
B0-5
2
811
W3
812
B6-8,12-16
1.5 GHz
J101
GND
B9-11,17
B0-3
814
1217
B6-17
815
816
2.4 GHz
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
750 MHz
L
1.500 to 3.125
R
813
B6,9,12,17
I
818
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
6
1
1.566 to 2.087
3.133 to 4.174
1.563 to 2.083
3.125 to 4.167
3.125 to 4.167
7
1
2.087 to 2.629
4.174 to 5.258
2.083 to 2.625
4.167 to 5.250
4.167 to 5.250
8
1
2.629 to 3.129
5.258 to 6.258
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250
5.250 to 6.250
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
418
414
411
X2
Level
Adjust
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,13,14
+10V REF
-10V REF
+1.78V BIAS REF
+10V REF
DRIVE
-1.25V BIAS REF
BREAKPOINT 1
1
1.564 to 2.085
6.258 to 8.341
1.563 to 2.083
6.250 to 8.333
6.250 to 8.333
10
1
2.085 to 2.452
8.341 to 9.808
2.083 to 2.450
8.333 to 9.800
8.333 to 9.800
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
717
MASS
B8,11,15,16
615
616
J206
11
1
2.452 to 2.627
9.808 to 10.508
2.450 to 2.625
9.800 to 10.500
9.800 to 10.500
12
3
1.751 to 2.085
3.503 to 4.169
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250 10.500 to 12.500
13*
3
2.085 to 2.251
4.169 to 4.503
1.563 to 1.687
6.250 to 6.750 12.500 to 13.500
13**
3
2.085 to 2.501
4.169 to 5.003
1.563 to 1.875
6.250 to 7.500 12.500 to 15.000
14**
3
2.501 to 2.626
5.003 to 5.253
1.875 to 1.969
7.500 to 7.875 15.000 to 15.750
W32
618
PRELEVEL DAC
POWER
BUS
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
+15V REF
617
R
W8
J204
LOG AMP
B10,11
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
+9V REF
518
612
718
9
-15V REF
611
B9,17
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
517
DET VOLTAGE OUT
X2
+5V REF
711
714
OFFSET
PHASE LOCK IF DET
516
712
BREAKPOINT 2
+5V REF
817
A21
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 1
716
TEMP COMP
SLOPE COMP
W31
W13
POWER DAC
POWER
BUS
W12
W9
A22
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 2
15**
16**
17**
3
3
3
2.626 to 2.779
2.779 to 3.126
1.563 to 1.667
5.253 to 5.558
5.558 to 6.253
6.253 to 6.669
1.969 to 2.083
2.083 to 2.344
2.344 to 2.500
A8 MULTIPLIER
A9 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
B5-17
7.875 to 8.333 15.750 to 16.667
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
8.333 to 9.375 16.667 to 18.750
9.375 to 10.000 18.750 to 20.000
5 MHz REF
B0-3
J101
J105
2250 MHz
VCO 417
415
2.4 GHz
W4
J100
B0-5
J106
B0-3
FRAC-N
LOGIC
* Applies to 13.5 GHz analyzers only.
** Applies to 20 GHz analyzers only.
1114
B4-17
2
W5
B4-17
B0-5
B0-3
B6-17
414
DC BIAS 1
411
PORT 2
BIAS
INPUT
DC BIAS 2
TRIGGER OUT
POWER
BUS
TO A19, A20
TRIGGER OUT
TRIGGER IN
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
AUX IO
AUX IO
INTERFACE
TEST SET IO
TEST SET IO
INTERFACE
HANDLER IO
HANDLER IO
INTERFACE
n5230cblk_140_240
2 January 2008
S1
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
W14
B0-11
50
W6
1117
50
B12-17
10.50 - 12.50 GHz
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
12.50 - 16.67 GHz
B6,9,13-15
I
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
B0-8,12
50
5
B12
750 MHz
R
A16 TEST SET
MOTHERBOARD
4
+5V REF
B9-11,13-17
L
PORT 1
BIAS
INPUT
50
GND
R
B6-8,12
1.5 GHz
J101
J26
J23
50
1111
416
1.5 GHz
B4
A19 MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER/
SWITCH/SPLITTER 20 (MASSQuad)
1113
POWER
DAC
3
ALC
3.2 GHz
1115
X2
418
Level
Adjust
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
B9,13-15
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,16,17
X2
B13-15
W7
W10
A23
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 3
16.67 - 20.00 GHz
B16, 17
X2
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
B8,11,12
+5V REF
W15
B10,11,16,17
POWER
BUS
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
POWER
BUS
FROM
A16
W11
A24
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 4
W16
Troubleshooting
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 1
4-46
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
REAR PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
N5230C PNA-L Overall Block Diagram
4-Port, 300 kHz to 13.5 GHz and 20 GHz
Options 145 and 245
Service Guide: N5230-90024
A1
KEYPAD
RPG
INVERTER
A2
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
CONTROL
Port 1
W21
J1
ADC
20.0 MHz
A
A
15 MHz
EEPROM
PCI BUS
MAIN
CPU
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE
PCI BUS
B
LAN
10/100 BASE-T
ETHERNET
VGA
VGA
INTERFACE
RAM
R
A
W60
CPLR
ARM
20.0 MHz
I
C
C
Port 2
W54
7.66 MHz *
W23
J4
ADC
L
R
RCVR
B IN
B
DSP
W60
15 MHz
VIDEO PROCESSOR
ADC
RAM
VIDEO RAM
W24
J5
D
D
W55
A41 HARD
DISK DRIVE
R
C
Port 3
RCVR
C IN
W60
POWER BUS
20.0 MHz
W56
7.66 MHz *
USB
INTERFACE
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
5 MHz
I
L
R
CPLR
ARM
D
DITHER
NOISE
X8
A4
POWER
SUPPLY
LINE IN
L
R
R
A14 SYSTEM MOTHERBOARD
I
W25
J6
ADC
CPLR
ARM
20.0 MHz
7.66 MHz *
15 MHz
USB x 4
L
B
PCI
BRIDGE
15 MHz
ROM
I
W22
J2
ADC
RCVR
A IN
W53
7.66 MHz *
SPEAKER
A3 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
PARALLEL PORT
INTERFACE
GPIB
A20 MIXER BRICK (QuintBrick)
M ICRO CONTROLLER
RS-232 PORT
INTERFACE
PARALLEL
A5 SIGNAL PROCESSING
ADC MODULE (SPAM)
15 MHz
USB
INTERFACE
RS-232
USB x 2
USB
HUB
A15 CPU
USB
USB
BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN
& CONTROLLER
Port 4
RCVR
D IN
J3
20.0 MHz
W57
7.66 MHz *
I
TO A6, A7, A8, A9, A16
L
W60
R
R
CPLR
ARM
A10 FREQUENCY REFERENCE
* With spur avoidance OFF.
HIGH DENSITY DATA BUS
10 MHz
W26
EXT REF IN
10 MHz
211
200 Hz
With spur avoidance ON, for
frequencies below 40 MHz, the
IF frequency is set to various
values between 1 and 12 MHz
to avoid generating spurs.
POWER BUS
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
J2
2nd LO HB
100 MHz
215
10
ƒ
10 MHz
HIGH STAB
OCXO
J4
P. LOCK
REF
J5
MIXED POWER AND CONTROL SIGNALS
N/C
SERIAL TEST BUS NODES
Reference
RCVR
IN
W60
It is recommended that troubleshooting
be done with spur avoidance OFF to
ensure a fixed IF frequency.
Bx = ACTIVE SOURCE BAND
N/C
SOURCE
OUT
DAC
5 MHz
REF
5 MHz
10 MHz
W27
EXT REF OUT
10 MHz
2
W28
J12
J3
W29
FROM
A16
J10
W30
J11
Band
0
1
Mixer
Brick
L.O.
Harmonic
Number
(N)
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
A7 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A6
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A9/A13 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A8/A12
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A19/A18
MASS
Frequency
(GHz)
0.008 to 0.009
0.009 to 0.018
0.008 to 0.009
0.009 to 0.018
.0003 to 0.001
0.001 to 0.010
.0003 to 0.001
0.001 to 0.010
.0003 to 0.001
B5-17
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
0.001 to 0.010
3.2 GHz
3
1
1
0.018 to 0.048
0.048 to 0.756
0.018 to 0.048
0.048 to 0.756
0.010 to 0.040
0.040 to 0.748
0.010 to 0.040
0.040 to 0.748
0.010 to 0.040
4
1
0.756 to 1.508
0.756 to 1.508
0.748 to 1.500
0.748 to 1.500
415
5
1
1.508 to 3.133
1.508 to 3.133
1.500 to 3.125
1.500 to 3.125
B0-3
J101
J105
0.748 to 1.500
2250 MHz
VCO 417
W1
J100
B0-5
B4-17
J106
FRAC-N
LOGIC
5 MHz REF
1211
1214
B4-17
2
A16 TEST SET MOTHERBOARD
1213
416
B0-3
0.040 to 0.748
1215
POWER
DAC
1
ALC
1.5 GHz
B4
2
A6 MULTIPLIER
A7 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
W2
J101
B6-8,
12-16
B0-3
715
+5V REF
B0-8,12-16
B0-5
1.5 GHz
GND
2
811
W3
812
814
B9-11,17
1217
B6-17
815
816
2.4 GHz
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
750 MHz
L
1.500 to 3.125
R
813
B6,9,12,17
I
818
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
6
7
1
1
1.566 to 2.087
2.087 to 2.629
3.133 to 4.174
4.174 to 5.258
1.563 to 2.083
2.083 to 2.625
3.125 to 4.167
4.167 to 5.250
3.125 to 4.167
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
4.167 to 5.250
411
8
1
2.629 to 3.129
5.258 to 6.258
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250
5.250 to 6.250
X2
418
414
Level
Adjust
B9,17
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,13,14
+10V REF
-10V REF
+1.78V BIAS REF
+10V REF
DRIVE
-1.25V BIAS REF
BREAKPOINT 1
+5V REF
BREAKPOINT 2
1
1.564 to 2.085
6.258 to 8.341
1.563 to 2.083
6.250 to 8.333
6.250 to 8.333
717
MASS
B10,11
J206
615
616
10
1
2.085 to 2.452
8.341 to 9.808
2.083 to 2.450
8.333 to 9.800
8.333 to 9.800
11
1
2.452 to 2.627
9.808 to 10.508
2.450 to 2.625
9.800 to 10.500
W32
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
518
618
PRELEVEL DAC
POWER
BUS
617
3
1.751 to 2.085
3.503 to 4.169
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250 10.500 to 12.500
13*
3
2.085 to 2.251
4.169 to 4.503
1.563 to 1.687
6.250 to 6.750 12.500 to 13.500
13**
3
2.085 to 2.501
4.169 to 5.003
1.563 to 1.875
6.250 to 7.500 12.500 to 15.000
CPLR
THRU
A21
TEST PORT
COUPLER
R
J204
PORT 1
716
TEMP COMP
SLOPE COMP
W31
W49
POWER DAC
Port 2
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
POWER
BUS
SOURCE
OUT
W41
9.800 to 10.500
12
W60
W44
+15V REF
714
LOG AMP
B8,11,15,16
SOURCE
OUT
W40
+9V REF
611
718
9
517
Port 1
-15V REF
612
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
711
DET VOLTAGE OUT
X2
+5V REF
516
712
OFFSET
PHASE LOCK IF DET
817
W60
W45
W48
CPLR
THRU
A22
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 2
14**
15**
16**
17**
3
3
3
3
2.501 to 2.626
2.626 to 2.779
2.779 to 3.126
1.563 to 1.667
5.003 to 5.253
5.253 to 5.558
5.558 to 6.253
6.253 to 6.669
1.875 to 1.969
1.969 to 2.083
2.083 to 2.344
2.344 to 2.500
A8 MULTIPLIER
A9 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
7.500 to 7.875 15.000 to 15.750
B5-17
7.875 to 8.333 15.750 to 16.667
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
8.333 to 9.375 16.667 to 18.750
9.375 to 10.000 18.750 to 20.000
B0-3
J101
J105
415
2250 MHz
VCO 417
2.4 GHz
W4
J100
B0-5
B4-17
J106
B0-3
5 MHz REF
1114
B4-17
2
FRAC-N
LOGIC
* Applies to 13.5 GHz analyzers only.
** Applies to 20 GHz analyzers only.
W5
PORT 1
BIAS
INPUT
A16 TEST SET
MOTHERBOARD
DC BIAS 1
411
PORT 2
BIAS
INPUT
Port 3
50
W42
1117
50
B12-17
B12
B6,9,13-15
X2
418
Level
Adjust
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
B9,13-15
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,16,17
X2
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
A25 STEP
ATTEN
W58
CPLR
THRU
A23
TEST PORT
COUPLER
W59
0-60 dB
FROM
A16
B8,11,12
+5V REF
5
PORT 3
16.67 - 20.00 GHz
B16,17
X2
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
12.50 - 16.67 GHz
B13-15
W60
W46
10.50 - 12.50 GHz
I
SOURCE
OUT
B10,11,16,17
W51
Port 4
DC BIAS 2
TRIGGER OUT
B0-11
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
750 MHz
414
4
W6
B6-17
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
W50
50
+5V REF
B9-11,13-17
B0-3
R
50
50
B6-8,12
1.5 GHz
J101
J26
J23
GND
B0-8,12
B0-5
L
R
1111
416
1.5 GHz
B4
1113
POWER
DAC
3
ALC
3.2 GHz
1115
A19 MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER/
SWITCH/SPLITTER 20 (MASSQuad)
POWER
BUS
TO A19, A20, A25
TRIGGER OUT
TRIGGER IN
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
POWER
BUS
SOURCE
OUT
W43
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
POWER
BUS
FROM
A16
W60
W47
CPLR
THRU
A24
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 4
AUX IO
AUX IO
INTERFACE
TEST SET IO
TEST SET IO
INTERFACE
HANDLER IO
HANDLER IO
INTERFACE
n5230cblk_145_245
2 January 2008
S1
W52
Troubleshooting
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 2
4-48
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
REAR PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
FRONT PANEL
INTERCONNECTS
N5230C PNA-L Overall Block Diagram
4-Port, 300 kHz to 13.5 GHz and 20 GHz
Options 146 and 246
Service Guide: N5230-90024
A1
KEYPAD
RPG
A2
DISPLAY
INVERTER
DISPLAY
CONTROL
A3 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
VGA
VGA
INTERFACE
PCI BUS
I
RCVR
B IN
20.0 MHz
ADC
I
C
C
15 MHz
VIDEO PROCESSOR
VIDEO RAM
B
CPLR
ARM
W24
J5
ADC
RAM
Port 3
D
15 MHz
A41 HARD
DISK DRIVE
D
W55
I
5 MHz
CPLR
ARM
J3
10
ƒ
10 MHz
HIGH STAB
OCXO
J4
P. LOCK
REF
J5
L
R
R
W60
With spur avoidance ON, for
frequencies below 40 MHz, the
IF frequency is set to various
values between 1 and 12 MHz
to avoid generating spurs.
MIXED POWER AND CONTROL SIGNALS
TO A12, A13, A17
N/C
CPLR
ARM
W80
I
* With spur avoidance OFF.
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
215
RCVR
D IN
Reference
HIGH DENSITY DATA BUS
J2
2nd LO HB
D
20.0 MHz
POWER BUS
100 MHz
R
RCVR
IN
A11
Vertical
Motherboard
211
L
W60
TO A6, A7, A8, A9, A16
200 Hz
Port 4
W56
I
7.66 MHz *
10 MHz
W60
DITHER
NOISE
X8
A4
POWER
SUPPLY
A10 FREQUENCY REFERENCE
C
20.0 MHz
LOCAL DIGITAL BUS
LINE IN
R
R
R
POWER BUS
USB
INTERFACE
L
W25
J6
A14 SYSTEM MOTHERBOARD
RCVR
C IN
20.0 MHz
7.66 MHz *
EXT REF IN
10 MHz
L
R
DSP
ADC
W26
W60
W54
7.66 MHz *
W23
J4
7.66 MHz *
USB x 4
A
B
PCI
BRIDGE
RAM
L
R
Port 2
B
15 MHz
ROM
10/100 BASE-T
ETHERNET
PCI BUS
MAIN
CPU
W53
7.66 MHz *
W22
J2
ADC
CPLR
ARM
20.0 MHz
A
A
15 MHz
EEPROM
GPIB PORT
INTERFACE
LAN
W60
W21
J1
ADC
SPEAKER
PARALLEL PORT
INTERFACE
GPIB
Port 1
RCVR
A IN
A20 MIXER BRICK (QuintBrick)
M ICRO CONTROLLER
RS-232 PORT
INTERFACE
PARALLEL
A5 SIGNAL PROCESSING
ADC MODULE (SPAM)
15 MHz
USB
INTERFACE
RS-232
USB x 2
USB
HUB
A15 CPU
USB
USB
BOARD
TOUCHSCREEN
& CONTROLLER
SERIAL TEST BUS NODES
SOURCE
OUT
It is recommended that troubleshooting
be done with spur avoidance OFF to
ensure a fixed IF frequency.
Bx = ACTIVE SOURCE BAND
N/C
DAC
5 MHz
REF
5 MHz
10 MHz
W27
EXT REF OUT
10 MHz
2
W28
J12
J3
W69
A29
REFERENCE
CHANNEL
SWITCH
C
J10
N/C
W68
Limiter
FROM
A16
DC
Block
W70
J11
1
A6 MULTIPLIER
A7 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
B5-17
Band
Mixer
Brick
L.O.
Harmonic
Number
(N)
2
1
A7 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A6
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
4
3
A9/A13 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A8/A12
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
5
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
0
1
0.008 to 0.009
0.008 to 0.009
.0003 to 0.001
.0003 to 0.001
.0003 to 0.001
1
1
0.009 to 0.018
0.009 to 0.018
0.001 to 0.010
0.001 to 0.010
0.001 to 0.010
FRAC-N
LOGIC
B0-3
J101
J105
415
2250 MHz
VCO 417
1
0.018 to 0.048
0.018 to 0.048
0.010 to 0.040
0.010 to 0.040
0.010 to 0.040
3
1
0.048 to 0.756
0.048 to 0.756
0.040 to 0.748
0.040 to 0.748
0.040 to 0.748
4
1
0.756 to 1.508
0.756 to 1.508
0.748 to 1.500
0.748 to 1.500
0.748 to 1.500
J100
B0-5
B4-17
W2
J101
B6-8,
12-16
B0-3
715
+5V REF
B0-8,12-16
B0-5
1.5 GHz
GND
2
811
W3
812
814
B9-11,17
1217
B6-17
815
816
2.4 GHz
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
750 MHz
L
R
2
W1
J106
B0-3
5 MHz REF
1211
1214
B4-17
2
A16 TEST SET MOTHERBOARD
1213
416
1.5 GHz
B4
A19/A18
MASS
Frequency
(GHz)
1
ALC
3.2 GHz
1215
POWER
DAC
813
B6,9,12,17
I
818
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
411
X2
418
414
Level
Adjust
B9,17
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,13,14
1
1.508 to 3.133
1.508 to 3.133
1.500 to 3.125
1.500 to 3.125
1
1.566 to 2.087
3.133 to 4.174
1.563 to 2.083
3.125 to 4.167
3.125 to 4.167
7
1
2.087 to 2.629
4.174 to 5.258
2.083 to 2.625
4.167 to 5.250
4.167 to 5.250
8
1
2.629 to 3.129
5.258 to 6.258
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250
5.250 to 6.250
9
1
1.564 to 2.085
6.258 to 8.341
1.563 to 2.083
6.250 to 8.333
6.250 to 8.333
10
1
2.085 to 2.452
8.341 to 9.808
2.083 to 2.450
8.333 to 9.800
8.333 to 9.800
11
1
2.452 to 2.627
9.808 to 10.508
2.450 to 2.625
9.800 to 10.500
9.800 to 10.500
12
3
1.751 to 2.085
3.503 to 4.169
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250 10.500 to 12.500
13*
3
2.085 to 2.251
4.169 to 4.503
1.563 to 1.687
6.250 to 6.750 12.500 to 13.500
13**
3
2.085 to 2.501
4.169 to 5.003
1.563 to 1.875
6.250 to 7.500 12.500 to 15.000
+1.78V BIAS REF
+10V REF
-1.25V BIAS REF
717
615
J206
616
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
618
PRELEVEL DAC
POWER
BUS
W60
W44
+15V REF
617
CPLR
THRU
A21
TEST PORT
COUPLER
611
MASS
W32
SOURCE
OUT
W40
+9V REF
R
J204
LOG AMP
B8,11,15,16
Port 1
W67
714
DET VOLTAGE OUT
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
W66
-15V REF
518
712
OFFSET
PHASE LOCK IF DET
517
711
BREAKPOINT 1
BREAKPOINT 2
+5V REF
516
817
DRIVE
718
1.500 to 3.125
6
-10V REF
612
B10,11
5
+10V REF
X2
+5V REF
From
A17J10
2
PORT 1
716
TEMP COMP
SLOPE COMP
W31
W49
POWER DAC
Port 2
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
W71
POWER
BUS
SOURCE
OUT
W41
W60
W45
A22
TEST PORT
COUPLER
PORT 2
A8 MULTIPLIER
A9 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
B5-17
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
B4
3
2.501 to 2.626
5.003 to 5.253
1.875 to 1.969
7.500 to 7.875 15.000 to 15.750
15**
3
2.626 to 2.779
5.253 to 5.558
1.969 to 2.083
B0-3
J101
J105
415
2250 MHz
VCO 417
7.875 to 8.333 15.750 to 16.667
16**
3
2.779 to 3.126
5.558 to 6.253
2.083 to 2.344
8.333 to 9.375 16.667 to 18.750
17**
3
1.563 to 1.667
6.253 to 6.669
2.344 to 2.500
9.375 to 10.000 18.750 to 20.000
2.4 GHz
W4
J100
B0-5
B4-17
J106
FRAC-N
LOGIC
5 MHz REF
W5
B0-3
411
* Applies to 13.5 GHz analyzers only.
** Applies to 20 GHz analyzers only.
Port 3
50
50
B12-17
B6,9,13-15
X2
Level
Adjust
X2
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
B9,13-15
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,16,17
12.50 - 16.67 GHz
B13-15
W58
5
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
W51
Port 4
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
POWER
BUS
FROM
A16
POWER
BUS
PORT 4
A16 TEST SET
MOTHERBOARD
A12 MULTIPLIER
A13 FRACTIONAL-N SYNTHESIZER
B5-17
PORT 2
BIAS
INPUT
1.5 - 3.125 GHz
VCO 412
413
1115
DC BIAS 2
1.5 GHz
POWER
BUS
TRIGGER IN
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
B0-3
J101
J105
415
2250 MHz
VCO 417
2.4 GHz
W61
J100
B0-5
B4-17
J106
FRAC-N
LOGIC
5 MHz REF
1114
B4-17
2
B0-3
TO A19, A20, A25
TRIGGER OUT
W62
TEST SET IO
INTERFACE
B0-3
HANDLER IO
HANDLER IO
INTERFACE
411
50
1117
R
B12-17
50
50
10.50 - 12.50 GHz
B6,9,13-15
I
X2
418
W52
50
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
750 MHz
414
J26
J23
50
B6-17
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
J204
B0-11
W63
B9-11,13-17
AUX IO
INTERFACE
TEST SET IO
4
+5V REF
A18 MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER/
SWITCH/SPLITTER 20 (MASSQuad)
W75
J206
B6-8,12
1.5 GHz
J101
GND
B0-8,12
B0-5
L
R
1111
416
W74
A17 QABC
1113
POWER
DAC
3
ALC
3.2 GHz
B4
Level
Adjust
B12
6.25 - 8.33 GHz
B9,13-15
4.167 - 5.25 GHz
B7,10,16,17
X2
X2
W78
8.33 - 10.5 GHz
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
B10,11,16,17
5
50
50
W79
0-60 dB
16.67 - 20.00 GHz
B16,17
B8,11,12
+5V REF
12.50 - 16.67 GHz
B13-15
A26 STEP
ATTEN
W77
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
VIA A11
W73
P512
POWER BUS
VIA A11
J4
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
VIA A11
POWER BUS
VIA A11
W76
J4
n5230cblk_146_246
2 January 2008
CPLR
THRU
A24
TEST PORT
COUPLER
DC BIAS 1
AUX IO
W60
W47
W72
TRIGGER OUT
SOURCE
OUT
W65
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
PORT 1
BIAS
INPUT
PORT 3
50
FROM
A16
B10,11,16,17
CPLR
THRU
A23
TEST PORT
COUPLER
W59
0-60 dB
B8,11,12
+5V REF
A25 STEP
ATTEN
50
16.67 - 20.00 GHz
B16,17
X2
5.25 - 6.25 GHz
W60
W46
10.50 - 12.50 GHz
3.125 - 4.167 GHz
418
SOURCE
OUT
W64
1117
B12
750 MHz
W50
R
B0-11
W6
B6-17
I
414
50
50
4
+5V REF
B9-11,13-17
ALC
FRAC-N
LOGIC
50
B6-8,12
1.5 GHz
J101
J26
J23
GND
B0-8,12
B0-5
L
R
1111
1114
B4-17
2
A19 MULTIPLIER/AMPLIFIER/
SWITCH/SPLITTER 20 (MASSQuad)
1113
416
1.5 GHz
3.2 GHz
1115
POWER
DAC
3
ALC
B0-3
14**
CPLR
THRU
S1
5 MHz REF
J803
5 MHz REF
5 MHz REF
J802
J801
5 MHz REF
J800
J10
LOCAL
DIGITAL BUS
VIA A11
POWER BUS
VIA A11
To A29
Troubleshooting
Instrument Block Diagrams Sheet 3
4-50
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
5
Theory of Operation
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-1
Theory of Operation
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
This chapter provides a general description of the operating theory of the N5230C 4-port PNA-L microwave
network analyzer.
•
Theory of operation is explained to the assembly level only.
•
Component-level circuit theory is not provided.
•
Simplified block diagrams are included for each functional group.
•
More detailed block diagrams are located at the end of Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
IMPORTANT
Although simplified block diagrams are included within the description of each functional
group, it is recommended that the more detailed block diagrams, located at the end of
Chapter 4, be unfolded and available for reference, as you read the information in this
chapter.
Chapter Five at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Network Analyzer System Operation
A summary of the theory of operation for the analyzer.
Page 5-3
A summary of the operation of the major functional
groups of the analyzer.
Synthesized Source Group Operation
Operation of the assemblies associated with the source
group, including Option 080, frequency offset mode.
Page 5-6
Signal Separation Group Operation
Operation of the assemblies associated with signal
separation, including the operation of Option 014,
configurable test set, and Option 1E1, source step
attenuators.
Page 5-16
Receiver Group Operation
Operation of the assemblies associated with the receiver
group.
Page 5-22
Digital Processing and Digital
Control Group Operation
Operation of the assemblies associated with digital
processing and control.
Page 5-25
Power Supply Group Operation
Operation of the power supply assembly group.
Page 5-30
5-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Network Analyzer System Operation
Network Analyzer System Operation
The PNA-L network analyzer generates a phase-locked incident signal and an LO signal from the internal
synthesized source. By means of signal separation, the incident signal is divided into a reference signal and
a test signal.
The reference signal is applied to the receiver group, while the test signal is applied to the device under test
(DUT) and then to the receiver group. The LO signal is applied directly to the receiver group where it is mixed
with the test and reference signals to produce IF signals for each of the four channels. These IF signals are
downconverted and then sampled and digitally processed. Figure 5-1 is a simplified block diagram of the
network analyzer system.
Figure 5-1
System Simplified Block Diagram (One Source)
Functional Groups of the Network Analyzer
The operation of the network analyzer can be separated into major functional groups. Each group consists of
assemblies that perform a distinct function in the instrument. Some of the assemblies are related to more
than one group, and all of the groups, to some extent, are interrelated and affect each other's performance.
The major functional groups are:
•
Synthesized Source Group
•
Signal Separation Group
•
Receiver Group
•
Digital Processor and Digital Control Group
•
Power Supply Group
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-3
Theory of Operation
Network Analyzer System Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Synthesized Source Group
The built-in synthesized source generates a swept, stepped, or continuous wave (CW) signal in the
frequency ranges as listed in Table 5-1. The source group provides two signals: an LO signal and an incident
signal. These two signals are normally at the same frequency (except for a 7.66 MHz offset) except for
Option 080, frequency offset mode, where they can be set to different frequencies.
The LO signal is sent directly to the mixers in the receiver group. The incident signal is routed to the front
panel test ports and then to the device under test (DUT) as the test signal. A portion of the incident signal is
either split or coupled off (in the signal separation group) and sent to the mixers in the receiver group as
reference signals. These reference signals are compared (mixed) with the LO signal in the receiver group.
The incident signal output power is leveled by an internal automatic leveling control (ALC) circuit. The
maximum output power level of the network analyzer at the test ports is shown in Table 5-1.
Options 146 and 246 add a second source to the synthesized source group. The primary source (source 1) is
routed to ports 1 and 2 while the secondary source (source 2) is routed to ports 3 and 4. The source 2 signal
path is either functionally the same as or similar to the source 1 signal path. The maximum output power
level for an analyzer with Option 146 or 246 is shown in Table 5-1.
Refer to “Synthesized Source Group Operation” on page 5-6.
Table 5-1
Frequency Range and Maximum Output Power Level
Options
Nominal
Output
Power
at
Instrument
Preset
140, 240b
Maximum Leveled Output Power
300 kHz
to
10 MHza
10 MHz
to
4 GHz
4 GHz
to
6 GHz
6 GHz
to
10.5 GHz
10.5 GHz
to
13.5 GHz
13.5 GHz
to
15 GHz
15 GHz
to
20 GHz
–5 dBm
+5 dBm
+8 dBm
+6 dBm
+3 dBm
0 dBm
0 dBm
–3 dBm
145, 245b
–8 dBm
+5 dBm
+8 dBm
+6 dBm
+1 dBm
–2 dBm
–2 dBm
–8 dBm
146, 246c
–8 dBm
+5 dBm
+8 dBm
+6 dBm
+1 dBm
–2 dBm
–2 dBm
–8 dBm
a. Values for 300 kHz to 10 MHz are typical.
b. Specifications are for Port 1 only; the values shown are typical characteristics for Ports 2, 3, and 4.
c. Specifications are for Ports 1 and 3 only; the values shown are typical characteristics for Ports 2 and 4.
5-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Network Analyzer System Operation
Signal Separation Group
The incident signal from the source group is separated into a reference path and a test path. The reference
signal is transmitted to the receiver group. The test signal is transmitted through—and reflected from—the
DUT and is then transmitted to the receiver group.
The signal separation group also provides:
•
RF path switching to allow forward and reverse measurements
•
external connections for the DUT (Option 014)
•
a step attenuator in the source path to reduce power to the DUT (Option 1E1)
Refer to “Signal Separation Group Operation” on page 5-16.
Receiver Group
The receiver converts the test and reference signals to 7.66 MHz intermediate frequency (IF) signals for
signal processing, retaining both magnitude and phase characteristics. The IF signals are converted to
digital information by the digital processing group.
Options 146 and 246 add a reference channel switch to the output of source 1 and source 2, to switch the
reference signal to the reference receiver between the two sources as required for measurements.
Refer to “Receiver Group Operation” on page 5-22.
Digital Processor and Digital Control Group
The digital processor and digital control group are divided into a front panel group and a data acquisition and
processing group. The front panel group provides communication to the network analyzer. The data
acquisition and processing group provides the output to the display, in addition to signal processing and
analyzer control.
Refer to “Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation” on page 5-25.
Power Supply Group
The power supply functional group provides power for the other assemblies in the instrument.
Refer to “Power Supply Group Operation” on page 5-30.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-5
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Synthesized Source Group Operation
The source group produces a stable output signal by phase locking a synthesized voltage-controlled
oscillator (VCO). Refer to Table 5-2 on page 5-8 for the full frequency range of the source. The outputs at the
front panel test ports are swept, stepped or CW signals. Maximum leveled output powers are listed in
Table 5-1 on page 5-4. For a simple block diagram of the source group, refer to Figure 5-2.
In this section the following are described:
•
Basic Operation
•
Frequency Offset Operation (Option 080)
•
A7, A9, and A13 (Options 146 and 246) Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards
•
A6, A8, and A12 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier Boards
•
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS 26.5) (MASSQuad)
•
A10 Frequency Reference Board (including rear-panel interconnects)
•
A16 Test Set Motherboard (including rear-panel interconnects)
•
A17 Source 2 ALC and Bias Control (QABC) Board (Options 146 and 246)
Basic Operation
Table 5-2 on page 5-8 lists the L.O. harmonic number, the synthesizer frequencies (A7, A9, and A13), and the
main source frequency (A19 and A18) within the analyzer for each band. This table is referred to throughout
this chapter and also appears on the overall block diagram at the end of Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
The A10 frequency reference board produces a constant phase locked reference signal of 5 MHz that is sent
to the A7, A9, and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards.
The A7 fractional-N synthesizer board produces an LO signal that is sent through the A6 multiplier to the A20
mixer brick. The frequency is synthesized such that the mixing product of this LO signal with the test signal
output is a constant 7.66 MHz when the spur avoidance function is OFF. With the spur avoidance function ON,
this IF signal is set to various values between 1 and 12 MHz, at source frequencies below 40 MHz, to avoid
generating spurious responses. This IF signal is sent to the A5 SPAM board for digital processing.
The A9 and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards produce an incident signal that is sent through the A8 or
A12 multiplier board and then the A19 or A18 MASSQuad to the front panel outputs. A portion of this signal
is either split (R channel) or coupled (A, B, C, D channels) off and sent to the A20 mixer brick where it is
mixed with the LO signal from the A6 multiplier board to produce the 7.66 MHz IF signal.
The A7, A9, and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards each contain their own phase lock circuitry. The A7
board is used to phase lock the LO signal while the A9 and A13 boards are used to phase lock the test
signals (the A9 for source 1 and the A13 for source 2). This makes it possible for the LO signal to be tuned to
a different frequency than the test signal, which is necessary since the LO signal is normally 7.66 MHz
higher than the test signal. Since the A7, A9, and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards each receive their 5
MHz input reference signal from the exact same source, their outputs remain in-phase even though they are
at different frequencies.
5-6
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 5-2
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
Source Group (One Source)
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-7
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
240, 245, or 246
140, 145, 146, 240, 245, or 246
Options
Table 5-2
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Subsweep Frequencies
Band
A20
Mixer
Brick
L.O.
Harmonic
A7 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A6
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A9/A13 Frac-N
Synthesizer
Frequency
(GHz)
A8
Multiplier
Frequency
(GHz)
A19/A18
MASSQuad
Frequency
(GHz)
0
1
0.008 to 0.009
0.008 to 0.009
.0003 to 0.001
.0003 to 0.001
.0003 to 0.001
1
1
0.009 to 0.018
0.009 to 0.018
0.001 to 0.010
0.001 to 0.010
0.001 to 0.010
2
1
0.018 to 0.048
0.018 to 0.048
0.010 to 0.040
0.010 to 0.040
0.010 to 0.040
3
1
0.048 to 0.756
0.048 to 0.756
0.040 to 0.748
0.040 to 0.748
0.040 to 0.748
4
1
0.756 to 1.508
0.756 to 1.508
0.748 to 1.500
0.748 to 1.500
0.748 to 1.500
5
1
1.508 to 3.133
1.508 to 3.133
1.500 to 3.125
1.500 to 3.125
1.500 to 3.125
6
1
1.566 to 2.087
3.133 to 4.174
1.563 to 2.083
3.125 to 4.167
3.125 to 4.167
7
1
2.087 to 2.629
4.174 to 5.258
2.083 to 2.625
4.167 to 5.250
4.167 to 5.250
8
1
2.629 to 3.129
5.258 to 6.258
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250
5.250 to 6.250
9
1
1.564 to 2.085
6.258 to 8.341
1.563 to 2.083
6.250 to 8.333
6.250 to 8.333
10
1
2.085 to 2.452
8.341 to 9.808
2.083 to 2.450
8.333 to 9.800
8.333 to 9.800
11
1
2.452 to 2.627
9.808 to 10.508
2.450 to 2.625
9.800 to 10.500
9.800 to 10.500
12
3
1.751 to 2.085
3.503 to 4.169
2.625 to 3.125
5.250 to 6.250
10.500 to 12.500
13*
3
2.085 to 2.251
4.169 to 4.503
1.563 to 1.687
6.250 to 6.750
12.500 to 13.500
13**
3
2.085 to 2.501
4.169 to 5.003
1.563 to 1.875
6.250 to 7.500
12.500 to 15.000
14
3
2.501 to 2.626
5.003 to 5.253
1.875 to 1.969
7.500 to 7.875
15.000 to 15.750
15
3
2.626 to 2.779
5.253 to 5.558
1.969 to 2.083
7.875 to 8.333
15.750 to 16.667
16
3
2.779 to 3.126
5.558 to 6.253
2.083 to 2.344
8.333 to 9.375
16.667 to 18.750
17
3
1.563 to 1.667
6.253 to 6.669
2.344 to 2.500
9.375 to 10.000
18.750 to 20.000
* Applies to 13.5 GHz analyzers only.
** Applies to 20 GHz analyzers only.
5-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
Frequency Offset Operation (Option 080)
Since the A7, A9 and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards each contain their own phase lock circuitry, they
can be phase locked independently to different output frequencies. Normally the LO signal is automatically
tuned to a frequency 7.66 MHz higher than that of the test signal to create the 7.66 MHz difference
frequency (IF) in the A20 mixer brick.
In frequency offset mode (Option 080), the LO signal can be independently tuned to any frequency (within its
tuning range) to allow for frequency offset measurements needed when testing devices such as mixers and
converters.
A7, A9, and A13 (Options 146 and 246) Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards
The A7, A9, and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards use the 5 MHz reference signal from the A10 frequency
reference board to tune two VCO circuits: one that sweeps from 1500 to 3125 MHz and one that is set to a
CW frequency of 2250 MHz.
In bands 0–3, these signals are mixed to produce the output frequencies listed in Table 5-2. In band 4, the
output of the swept VCO is passed through a divide-by-2 circuit to produce the output frequencies listed in
Table 5-2. In all other bands, the swept VCO signal is sent directly to the synthesizer output.
At the output, an ALC circuit maintains the power level at -5 dBm for bands 0–3 or  dBm for bands 4–17. In all
bands, the output is sent to either the A6, A8, or A12 multiplier board.
The output of the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board is 7.66 MHz higher than the output of the A9 and A13
fractional-N synthesizer boards. This is because the output of the A7 fractional-N synthesizer board is
routed through the A6 multiplier board to the A20 mixer brick where it is mixed with the test signal to
produce a 7.66 MHz IF signal for each of five channels. Refer to “A20 Mixer Brick” on page 5-22 for a more
complete description.
A6, A8, and A12 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier Boards
In bands 0–5, the input signal from the A7 A9, or A13 fractional-N synthesizer board is passed through the
multiplier board unchanged. For all other bands, the signals are doubled, filtered, and amplified. In the A6
board, in bands 9–11 and 17, the signals are again doubled, filtered, and amplified. In the A8 and A12 boards,
in bands 9– 11 and 13–17, the signals are again doubled, filtered, and amplified. Together these signals
create the full output frequency range of 300 kHz to 10.508 GHz for the A6 board or 300 kHz to 10.5 GHz for
the A8 and A12 boards.
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS
26.5) (MASSQuad)
In bands 0–11, the 300 kHz to 10.5 GHz inputs are filtered, amplified, and passed through the MASSQuad. In
bands 12–17, they are doubled, filtered, and amplified.
Together, these signal paths create the full output frequency range of 300 kHz to 20 GHz that is sent to the
splitter where a portion of the signal is used for the R channel reference signal and another portion for the
ALC circuit on either the A16 test set motherboard (for the A19) or the A17 QABC board (for the A18).
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-9
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
A10 Frequency Reference Board
This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument. A high stability 10 MHz
oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) normally provides the frequency standard. However, if a 10 MHz
external reference signal is detected at the 10 MHz EXT REF IN port on the rear panel, it is used as the
frequency reference instead.
The 10 MHz reference signal is used to phase lock a 100 MHz VCO. The output of this VCO is then divided by
ten to produce the 10 MHz EXT REF OUT rear panel signal. This 10 MHz signal is divided by two to produce 5
MHz reference signals for the A5 signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board, the A7 fractional-N
synthesizer board, and the A9 fractional-N synthesizer board.
Rear-Panel Interconnects
10 MHz REF. INPUT
A BNC connector that allows an external frequency reference signal to be used
to phase lock the analyzer for increased frequency accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature
when a signal is connected to this input. When the signal is removed, the
analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference.
10 MHz REF. OUTPUT
5-10
A BNC connector that allows a 10 MHz reference signal, produced by the A10
frequency reference board, to be output for use in phase locking external test
equipment.
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
A16 Test Set Motherboard
The A16 test set motherboard serves these functions:
•
to act as an interface between the A15 CPU board and the auxiliary rear panel interconnects.
•
to provide ALC signals to the A19 MASSQuad.
•
to route control signals to the signal separation group. Refer to “Signal Separation Group Operation” on
page 5-16 for more information.
Rear Panel Interconnects
The A16 test set motherboard includes the following rear panel interconnects.
TEST SET I/O
A DB-25 female connector that is used to control external test sets. The external test set
bus consists of 13 multiplexed address and data lines, three control lines, and an
open-collector interrupt line. Pin assignments are listed in Table 5-3 on page 5-12.
Up to 16 test sets may be “daisy-chained” on the bus at one time.
The Test Set I/O is not compatible with 8753 network analyzer test sets.
HANDLER I/O
A rectangular 36-pin, female connector providing four independent parallel input/output
ports, nine control signal lines, one ground, and a power supply line. This connector has
Type 2 output pin assignments as listed in Table 5-4 on page 5-13.
All signals are TTL-compatible. Data input/output ports consist of two 8-bit output ports
(Port A and Port B) and two 4-bit bidirectional ports (Port C and Port D).
Connector settings can be changed using SCPI and COM commands. The settings are not
accessible from the front panel.
AUX I/O
A DB-25 male connector that provides a variety of both analog and digital input and output
signals as described in Table 5-5 on page 5-14.
I/O 1 (TRIG IN)
A BNC connector for input of an external trigger. The analyzer can be triggered by an
external device using this input. This is the same signal that appears on AUX I/O pin 19 as
described in Table 5-5 on page 5-14.
I/O 2 (TRIG OUT)
A BNC connector for output of a trigger signal. This trigger signal can be used to trigger
external devices used in the measurement setup, such as signal generators.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-11
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
Table 5-3
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
TEST SET I/O Connector Pin Assignments
DB-25 Female Connector
Pin Numbers
Name
Function
1
SEL0
TTL out, test set select bit 0, tied to 0 V
2
Sweep Holdoff In
TTL in, low level holds off sweep
3–6
AD12–AD8
TTL I/O, address and latched data
7
GND
0 V, ground reference
8
LAS
TTL out, active low address strobe (1 s min)
9–11
AD4–AD2
TTL I/O, address and latched data
12
GND
0 V, ground reference
13
Interrupt In
TTL in, low level (10 s min) aborts sweep
14
+22 V
+22 Vdc, 100 mA max.
15–16
SEL1–2
TTL out, test set select bits 1-2, tied to 0 V
17
AD11
TTL I/O, address and latched data
18
SEL3
TTL out, test set select bit 3, tied to 0 V
19–21
AD7–5
TTL I/O, address and latched data
22–23
AD0–1
TTL I/O, address and latched data
24
LDS
TTL out, active low data strobe (1 s min)
25
RLW
TTL out, high = read, low = write
5-12
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 5-4
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
HANDLER I/O Connector Key Pin Assignments
Rectangular 36-Pin Female Connector
Pin Numbers
Name
Function
1
GND
0 V, ground reference
2
INPUT1
TTL in, negative pulse (1 s min) latches OUTPUT1-2
3–4
OUTPUT1–2
TTL out, latched
5–12
Port A0–7 Out
TTL out, latched
13–20
Port B0–7 Out
TTL out, latched
21–24
Port C I/O
TTL I/O, latched
25–28
Port D I/O
TTL I/O, latched
29
Port C Status
TTL out, low = input mode, high = output mode
30
Port D Status
TTL out, low = input mode, high = output mode
31
Output Strobe
Write Strobe
TTL out, active low data write strobe (1 s min)
32
No connect
Not used
33
Pass Fail
TTL out, latched, indicates pass fail (programmable polarity)
34
+5 V
+5 Vdc, 100 mA max.
35
Sweep End
TTL out, active low (10 s min) indicates sweep done
36
Pass/Fail Write
Strobe
TTL out, active low pass/fail write strobe (1 s min)
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-13
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
Table 5-5
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
AUX I/O Connector Pin Assignments
DB-25 Male Connector
Pin Numbers
Name
Function
1
ACOM
0 V, ground reference for analog signals
2–3
Analog Out 2–1
-10 to +10 Vdc output, 10 mA max, Ro = 100 W
4
No connect
For future enhancements
5
DCOM
0 V, ground reference for digital signals
6–8
Pulse Out 3–1
TTL out, programmable pulse (for future use)
9
+5 V
+5 Vdc output, 100 mA max.
10
Pass/Fail Write Strobe
TTL out, active low (1 s min) indicates pass/fail line is valid
11
Sweep End
TTL out, active low (10 s min) indicates sweep is done
12
Pass/Fail
TTL out, latched, indicates pass or fail (programmable polarity)
13
Output Port Write Strobe
TTL out, active low (10 s min) writes I/O port data
14
Analog In
-10 to +10 Vdc input, Ri = 100k W
15
ACOM
0 V, ground reference for analog signals
16
Power Button In
Open-collector input, active low replicates a power button press
17
DCOM
0 V, ground reference for digital signals
18
Ready for Trigger
TTL out, low indicates ready for external trigger
19
External Trigger In
TTL in, level trigger (width >1 ms), programmable polarity
20
Footswitch In
TTL in, active low (width >1 ms), triggers a programmable event
21
+22 V
+22 Vdc output, 100 mA max.
22–25
In/Out Port C0–3
TTL I/O, general purpose
5-14
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Synthesized Source Group Operation
A17 Source 2 ALC and Bias Control (QABC) Board (Options 146 and 246)
The A17 QABC board serves the following functions:
•
Provides ALC and control signals to the A18 source 2 MASSQuad.
•
Routes control signals to the A26 source 2 step attenuator.
•
Routes control signals to the A29 reference channel switch.
•
Provides distribution for the 5 MHz reference signal from the A10 frequency reference board to the A7,
A9, and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-15
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Signal Separation Group Operation
The signal separation group divides the source incident signal into a reference path and a test path. Refer to
Figure 5-3 on page 5-16.
•
The reference signal is transmitted to the receiver group as the R input.
•
The test signal is transmitted through—and reflected from—the device under test (DUT) and then is
transmitted to the receiver group as the A, B, C, and D inputs.
•
Control lines to this group are routed from the A16 test set motherboard.
In this section, the following assemblies are described:
•
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS 26.5) (MASSQuad)
•
A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers
•
A25 (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246) and A26 (Options 146 and 246) 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
•
Front Panel Jumpers—Configurable Test Set (Options 145, 146, 245, and 246)
Figure 5-3
5-16
Standard Test Set Configuration (One Source)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS
26.5) (MASSQuad)
After the source signal has been amplified, filtered, and multiplied, it is sent to the splitter where a portion of
the signal is split off to provide the R channel reference signal.
Options 146 and 246 include a reference channel switch (A29), a limiter, and a DC block in the reference
channel path to provide the capability to select either source 1 or source 2 as the reference signal. See “A29
Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246)” on page 5-22 for additional
information.
Another portion of the source signal is split off and sent to the ALC circuitry, (located on the A16 test set
motherboard for the A19 and on the A17 QABC board for the A18), to provide leveling control.
The remaining signal is sent to a switch (through a step attenuator for Options 145, 146, 245, and 246) where
it is switched to the test port couplers.
•
For Options 145 and 245, the signal from the A19 MASSQuad is sent through the A25 source step
attenuator back to a switch on the A19 MASSQuad where it is switched to one of the four test port
couplers, A21–A24.
•
For Options 146 and 246, the signal from the A19 source 1 MASSQuad is sent through the A25 source
step attenuator back to a switch on the A19 MASSQuad where it is switched to either the A21 or A22
test port coupler.
The signal from the A18 source 2 MASSQuad is sent through the A26 source step attenuator back to a
switch on the A18 MASSQuad where it switched to either the A23 or A24 test port coupler.
Refer also to “A19 and A18 (Options 146 and 246) Multiplier/Amplifier/Switch/Splitter 26.5 (MASS 26.5)
(MASSQuad)” on page 5-9.
A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers
The test port signal goes into the through-line arm of the couplers, and from there to the test ports and the
DUT. The coupled arm of the couplers carries the signal reflected from or transmitted through the DUT, to the
receiver (through a front panel jumper for Options 146, 146, 245 and 246) for measurement. The coupling
coefficient of the directional couplers is nominally 15 dB over the full frequency range.
A25 (Options 145, 245, 146, and 246) and A26 (Options 146 and 246) 60-dB Source Step
Attenuator
The 60-dB step attenuator provides coarse power control for the test port signals. It is an
electro-mechanical step attenuator that provides 0 to 60 dB of attenuation in 10-dB steps. It adjusts the
power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path. This
attenuator is controlled by the A15 CPU board.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-17
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Configurable Test Set (Options 145, 146, 245, and 246)
The Option 145, 146, 245, or 246 analyzer allows you to measure devices with higher power and higher
dynamic range limits than the standard analyzer. The theory of operation is the same as for the standard
analyzer except that there are nine front panel SMA jumpers.
As shown in Figure 5-4 on page 5-19 and in Figure 5-5 on page 5-20, these nine jumpers are installed
between the assemblies listed below.
Four jumpers for all options:
•
the A21 test port 1 coupler and the A20 mixer brick channel A
•
the A22 test port 2 coupler and the A20 mixer brick channel B
•
the A23 test port 3 coupler and the A20 mixer brick channel C
•
the A24 test port 4 coupler and the A20 mixer brick channel D
Five additional jumpers for Options 145 and 245:
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A21 test port 1 coupler
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A22 test port 2 coupler
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A23 test port 3 coupler
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A24 test port 4 coupler
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A20 mixer brick channel R
Five additional jumpers for Options 146 and 246:
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A21 test port 1 coupler
•
the A19 MASSQuad and the A22 test port 2 coupler
•
the A18 MASSQuad and the A23 test port 3 coupler
•
the A18 MASSQuad and the A24 test port 4 coupler
•
the A29 reference channel switch, limiter, and DC block and the A20 mixer brick channel R
Normal Configurable Test Set Configuration
The normal configurable test set configuration (configurable test set and source step attenuator) is shown
in Figure 5-4 for Options 145 and 245 and in Figure 5-5 for Options 146 and 246.
Options 146 and 246 add a second source, a second attenuator, and a reference channel switch. The A29
reference channel switch provides the capability to select either source 1 or source 2 as the reference
signal. See “A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246)” on page 5-22 for
additional information.
With this configuration and inclusion of an external amplifier and accessories, you can calibrate the analyzer
and test devices at power levels up to +30 dBm. You can make measurements in the forward, reverse or both
directions and still achieve these high power levels. For more information on higher power measurements,
search for “Option 014” in the embedded help index in the analyzer.
5-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 5-4
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
Normal Configurable Test Set Configuration (One Source)
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-19
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
Figure 5-5
5-20
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Normal Configurable Test Set Configuration (Two Sources)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Signal Separation Group Operation
High Dynamic Range Configurable Test Set Configuration
With a few jumper changes, you can configure the configurable test set configuration for higher dynamic range
measurements. By swapping the front panel jumpers for one port, signal flow through the corresponding coupler is
reversed, increasing the test signal sensitivity by 15 dB.
In the forward direction, as shown in Figure 5-6, the signal flow through the test port 2 coupler (A22) is
reversed by arranging the front panel jumpers such that RCVR B IN connects to CPLR THRU and CPLR ARM
connects to SOURCE OUT. The configuration of the front panel jumpers is the same for both single source
and two source analyzers.
Search for “Option 014” in the embedded help index in the analyzer for more information.
Figure 5-6
High Dynamic Range Configurable Test Set Configuration (One Source)
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-21
Theory of Operation
Receiver Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Receiver Group Operation
The receiver group measures and processes the input signals into digital information for processing and
eventual display. Figure 5-7 on page 5-23 is a simplified block diagram of the receiver functional group.
In this section the following assemblies are described:
•
A20 Mixer Brick
•
A5 SPAM Board (Analog Description)
•
A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246)
A20 Mixer Brick
This assembly contains five identical amplifiers, mixers, and filters. With the spur avoidance function OFF,
the test signals (channels A, B, C, and D) and the reference signal (channel R) are mixed with a synthesized
source signal that is 7.66 MHz higher than the source incident signal to produce a 7.66 MHz IF signal.
With the spur avoidance function ON, at frequencies below 40 MHz, the IF is set to various values between
1 and 12 MHz to avoid spurious responses that could interfere with the measurement. Because of this, the
spur avoidance function should be OFF when troubleshooting the PNA.
The analog IF signal is sent to the A5 SPAM board where it is converted to digital information.
A5 SPAM Board (Analog Description)
The A5 SPAM board contains digital and analog circuitry. For digital descriptions, refer to “A5 SPAM Board
(Digital Description)” on page 5-28.
In this assembly, the IF signals from the A, B, C, D, and R mixers go through a gain stage where small signals
are amplified to ensure that they can be detected by the analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
All five signals are sampled simultaneously by the ADCs, where they are converted to digital form. The ADC
conversions are triggered by timing signals from the digital signal processor (DSP) in response to commands
from the central processing unit (CPU). The digitized data is processed into magnitude and phase data by the
DSP and sent to the CPU random access memory (RAM) by way of the peripheral component interconnect
(PCI) bus.
The processed and formatted data is finally routed to the display, and to the general-purpose interface bus
(GPIB) for remote operation. Refer to “Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation” on page 5-25 for
more information on signal processing.
A29 Reference Channel Switch, Limiter, and DC Block (Options 146 and 246)
In these assemblies, the reference signals from the A19 source 1 MASSQuad and the A18 source 2
MASSQuad are switched into the reference receiver mixer in the A20 mixer brick. See Figure 5-8 on page 5-24.
The reference signal comes from the synthesized source, passes through the A29 reference channel switch,
goes through the limiter and DC block, through a front-panel jumper, and then to the receiver reference input of
the A20 mixer brick.
The limiter and DC block protect the A29 reference channel switch from possible damage caused by signals
that may be input into the front-panel Reference SOURCE OUT connector.
5-22
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 5-7
Theory of Operation
Receiver Group Operation
Receiver Group (One Source)
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-23
Theory of Operation
Receiver Group Operation
Figure 5-8
5-24
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Receiver Group (Two Sources)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
The digital processor and control group provides digital control for the entire analyzer. It provides:
•
front panel operation,
•
output to the display,
•
math processing functions, and
•
communications between the analyzer and an external controller or peripherals.
A block diagram of the digital control functional group is shown in Figure 5-9 on page 5-26.
The digital control functional group consists of two subgroups:
•
Front Panel Subgroup
— A1 Keypad Assembly
— A2 Display Assembly
— A3 Front Panel Interface Board
— A14 system motherboard
— A11 vertical motherboard (Options 146 and 246)
•
Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup
— A5 SPAM Board (Digital Description)
— A15 CPU Board
— A41 Hard Disk Drive
— USB Hub
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-25
Theory of Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
Figure 5-9
5-26
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
Front Panel Subgroup
The front panel subgroup contains the following assemblies:
•
A1 Keypad Assembly
•
A2 Display Assembly
•
A3 Front Panel Interface Board
A1 Keypad Assembly
The A1 keypad assembly provides user interface to the analyzer. The front panel rotary pulse generator
(RPG) knob is not electrically connected to the keypad, but rather provides user inputs directly to the front
panel processor.
A2 Display Assembly
The A2 display assembly contains an 8.4 inch LCD with associated drive circuitry and backlight inverter. Two
cables between the A2 display assembly and the A3 front panel interface board provide all necessary power
and data for normal operation. The two cables are:
1. A cable to the inverter that supplies buffered power.
2. A cable to the display circuitry that supplies decoded data from the video processor on the A15 CPU
board and the necessary drive circuit power. The video data received from the A15 CPU board includes
the following:
• digital TTL horizontal sync
• digital TTL blue video
• digital TTL vertical sync
• blanking
• digital TTL red video
• data clock
• digital TTL green video
A3 Front Panel Interface Board
The A3 front panel interface board detects and decodes user inputs from the A1 keypad assembly and front
panel knob, and transmits them to the A15 CPU board by way of the A14 system motherboard. It also
decodes video data from the video processor on the A15 CPU board and supplies this to the A2 display
assembly. Power from the power bus on the A14 system motherboard is buffered and routed to the A1
keypad assembly and the A2 display assembly. All data and power signals are routed through a single cable
connector to the A14 system motherboard.
The A3 front panel interface board also includes the following items:
USB
Two universal serial bus (USB) jacks (industry standard 4-pin connectors) mounted on a
separate USB connector board that connects directly to the A3 front panel interface board.
Speaker
A speaker that emits the audio signals received from the A15 CPU board.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-27
Theory of Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Data Acquisition and Processing Subgroup
The data acquisition and processing subgroup contain the following assemblies. See Figure 5-9 on
page 5-26.
•
A5 SPAM Board (Digital Description)
•
A15 CPU Board (including rear-panel interconnects)
•
A41 Hard Disk Drive
•
USB Hub
A5 SPAM Board (Digital Description)
The A5 SPAM board contains digital and analog circuitry. For analog descriptions, refer to “A5 SPAM Board
(Analog Description)” on page 5-22.
The digital signal processor (DSP) receives digitized data from the digital circuitry of the A5 SPAM board. It
computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the analog IF
signal. The resulting raw data is written into the main random access memory (RAM). The data taking
sequence is triggered either externally from the rear panel or by firmware on the A15 CPU board.
A15 CPU Board
The A15 CPU board contains the circuitry to control the operation of the analyzer. Some of the components
include the central processing unit (CPU), memory (EEPROM, ROM, RAM), bus lines to other board
assemblies, and connections to the rear panel. Some of the main components are described next:
•
CPU
•
Main RAM
•
Rear Panel Interconnects
CPU The central processing unit (CPU) is a microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire
instrument through the instrument bus. The CPU receives external control information from the keypad, any
USB device, LAN or GPIB, and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw data in the main
RAM. It controls the DSP, the video processor, and the interconnect port interfaces. In addition, when the
analyzer is in the system controller mode, the CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral port
interfaces.
Front panel settings are stored in SRAM, with a battery providing at least five years of backup storage when
external power is off.
Main RAM The main random access memory (RAM) is shared memory for the CPU and the DSP. It stores
the raw data received from the DSP while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU. The CPU
reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM, converts it to a user-definable display format, and
writes this to the video processor for display.
Rear Panel Interconnects The rear panel includes the following interfaces:
USB
A universal serial bus (USB) jack (an industry standard 4-pin connector).
GPIB
A 24-pin, female, type D-24 connector that meets IEEE-488 standards.
Serial
A 9-pin, male, RS-232 compatible, D-sub connector.
5-28
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Theory of Operation
Digital Processing and Digital Control Group Operation
Parallel
A 36-pin, mini-D, 1284-C connector that provides connection to printers or any other parallel
port peripheral.
LAN
A standard 8-pin, 10/100BaseT, Ethernet connection. It auto selects between the two data
rates.
Display (VGA)
A 15-pin, female, D-sub connector that provides a video output of the analyzer display that
can be viewed on an external VGA monitor.
A41 Hard Disk Drive
The hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) is an integrated development environment (IDE) data storage device
which is connected directly to the A15 CPU board. The full operating system and firmware for the network
analyzer is stored on the A41 hard disk drive.
USB Hub
The rear-panel mounted, internal USB hub provides four additional USB ports for connection of external USB
compatible devices.
Service Guide N5230-90025
5-29
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Group Operation
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Power Supply Group Operation
The A4 power supply assembly is a switching power supply operating at 103 kHz switching frequency. The
input power ranges for the power supply are 90 to 132 Vac or 195 to 250 Vac. The power supply
automatically senses the input voltage and switches between these two ranges.
The dc output voltages are:
•
+5.2 V
•
5.2 V
•
+9 V
•
+15 V
•
+15 V standby (always on)
•
15 V
•
+22 V
•
VCC (5.2 V for the A15 CPU board)
•
VDL (3.3 V to the A15 CPU board)
The +15 V standby line remains on continuously whenever the power supply is plugged in. This line is used
to provide power to front panel LEDs and CPU components when the analyzer is turned off.
An additional +32 V supply line is generated on the A14 system motherboard from the +22 V supply line.
NOTE
5-30
If the power supply senses an over-voltage or over-current condition on any of the supply
lines, the power supply will cycle on and off at a low voltage level (burp mode).
Service Guide N5230-90025
6
Replaceable Parts
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-1
Replaceable Parts
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
This chapter:
•
identifies the replaceable parts for the Agilent PNA series microwave network analyzer.
•
includes several tables and illustrations to assist you in identifying the correct part for your analyzer.
•
contains ordering information for new assemblies and rebuilt-exchange assemblies.
Chapter Six at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Ordering Information
How to order a replaceable part from Agilent
Technologies.
Page 6-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The correct sequence for replacing a defective assembly.
Page 6-4
The definition of a rebuilt-exchange assembly.
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
The procedure for replacing and returning a defective
assembly to Agilent Technologies.
A table that provides the location of the assemblies in
your analyzer by reference designator.
Page 6-5
Page 6-6
A table that provides the location of the replaceable parts
in your analyzer by type of part:
Replaceable Parts Listings
6-2
•
Assemblies (front panel, top, and bottom)
•
Cables (top and bottom)
•
Hardware (internal, hard disk drive, rear panel, and
external)
•
Miscellaneous replaceable parts
Page 6-7
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Replaceable Parts
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
To order a part listed in the replaceable parts lists:
•
include the part number
•
indicate the quantity required
•
Contact Agilent Technologies for instructions on where to send the order. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
To order a part that is not listed in the replaceable parts lists:
•
include the instrument model number and complete instrument serial number
•
include the description and function of the part
•
indicate the quantity required
•
Contact Agilent Technologies for instructions on where to send the order. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-3
Replaceable Parts
Assembly Replacement Sequence
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps describe how to replace an assembly in the network analyzer.
Step 1. Identify the faulty group. Begin with Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.” Follow up with the appropriate
troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly.
Step 2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to this chapter.
Step 3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to Chapter 7,
“Repair and Replacement Procedures.”
Step 4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Step 5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
6-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Replaceable Parts
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies
Under the rebuilt-exchange assembly program:
•
Certain factory-repaired and tested assemblies are available on a trade-in basis.
•
Exchange assemblies are offered for lower cost than a new assembly, but meet all factory specifications
required of a new assembly.
•
The defective assembly must be returned for credit under the terms of the rebuilt-exchange assembly
program.
•
Spare assembly stock desired should be ordered using the new assembly part number.
Figure 6-1
Module Exchange Procedure
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-5
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Replaceable Parts Listings
This section contains the replacement part numbers and their descriptions for your Agilent microwave PNA.
You can find the locations of replaceable parts in this section:
•
listed by reference designator in Table 6-1, or
•
listed by the type of part in Table 6-2.
Table 6-1
Reference
Designator
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
Description
Keypad assembly
Display assembly
Front panel interface board
Power supply assembly
Signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board
Multiplier board
Fractional-N synthesizer board
Multiplier board
Fractional-N synthesizer board
Frequency reference board
Vertical motherboard (Options 146/246)
Multiplier board (Options 146/246)
Fractional-N synthesizer board
(Options 146/246)
A14
A15
System motherboard
CPU board
A16
Test set motherboard
A17
QABC board (Options 146/246)
MASSQuad 26.5—on A17 QABC board
(Options 146246)
MASSQuad 26.5
Mixer brick
Test port 1 coupler
Test port 2 coupler
Test port 3 coupler
Test port 4 coupler
Source 60-dB step attenuator
(Options 145/146/245/246)
Step attenuator—on A17 QABC board
(Options 146/246)
Reference switch—with wiring harness
(Options 146246)
Not used.
Hard disk drive assembly
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A29
A40
A41
6-6
Part Number Location by Reference Designator
Location
“Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options” on
page 6-10
“Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-12
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
“Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246” on
page 6-12
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240” on page 6-22
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245” on page 6-26
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on page 6-30
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240” on
page 6-22
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245” on
page 6-26
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on
page 6-30
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245” on page 6-26
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on page 6-30
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on
page 6-30
“Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 6-2
Part Number Location by Type of Part
Type of Part
Assemblies
Cables
Hardware
Miscellaneous
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Location
•
“Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options” on page 6-10
•
“Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-12
•
“Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16
•
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240” on page 6-22
•
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245” on page 6-26
•
“Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246” on page 6-30
•
“Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44
•
“Rear Panel Assembly, All Options” on page 6-42
•
“Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-14
•
“Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View)” on page 6-18
•
“Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)” on page 6-20
•
“Bottom Cables, Options 140 and 240” on page 6-24
•
“Bottom Cables, Options 145 and 245” on page 6-28
•
“Bottom Cables, Options 146 and 246” on page 6-32
•
“Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-34
•
“Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-36
•
“Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-38
•
“External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on page 6-40
•
“Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44
•
“Rear Panel Assembly, All Options” on page 6-42
•
Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options on page 6-8
•
Service Tools on page 6-48
•
Documentation on page 6-48
•
Protective Caps for Connectors on page 6-48
•
GPIB Cables/GPIB Adapter on page 6-48
•
Battery on page 6-48
•
Fuses on page 6-48
•
ESD Supplies on page 6-49
•
EMI/RFI Shielding Accessories on page 6-49
•
Upgrade Kits on page 6-49
•
Touch-up Paint on page 6-49
•
USB Accessories on page 6-49
•
Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits on page 6-49
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-7
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options
Reference
Designator
Qty
Description
1
Front frame
1
Keypad overlay
5041-9183
2
With handles—front handle side trim
5041-9174
2
Without handles—trim strip, filler
N5230-00015
1
Lower front dress panel
N5230-80006
1
Front panel overlay (all standard test set analyzers)
N5230-80007
1
Front panel overlay (all configurable test set analyzers)
➅
0515-4791
10
Machine screw, M3.0 x 4 flat head
➆
W1312-40017
1
Front knob
N5230-80020
1
Nameplate, N5230C 300 kHz to 13.5 GHz
N5230-80021
1
Nameplate, N5230C 300 kHz to 20 GHz
➀a
➁
➂c
➃
➄
➇
Part Number
N5230-20225
Was N5230-20125
N5230-80028
Was
b
N5230-80018
a. When ordering a replacement front frame assembly, you must also order items ➁, ➄, and ➇.
b. Use keyboard overlay part number N5230-80018 with the following models and serial numbers:
* E8362C: MY48120116 and below; SG48120102 and below.
* E8362CH85: MY48150106 and below; SG48150101 and below.
* E8363C: MY48130162 and below; SG48130102 and below.
* E8363CH85: MY48150101.
* E8364C: MY48140153.
* E8364CH85: MY48150101.
c. For part numbers of rack mount kits and handle kits, refer to “Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits” on page 6-49.
6-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-2
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Front Panel Assembly, Front Side, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-9
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options
Reference
Designator
Part Number
Qty
Description
A1
N5230-40002
1
Keypad assembly
A2
N5230-60045
1
Display assembly (Includes the following parts; not separately orderable.)
➊–LCD display, 8.4-inch, 1024 x 768 pixels
➋–Machine screw, M2.5 x 8 pan head
➌–Display ribbon cable
➍–Cable clamp (for display ribbon cable)
➎–Cable clamp (for inverter cable)
➏–Display bracket
➐–Cable clamp (for display cables and touchscreen cable)
A3
N5230-60132
1
Front panel interface board
➀
N5230-20225
1
Front frame
➁
8160-0660
1
RFI gasket
➂
N5230-40003
1
Touch screen rubber boot
➃
E6601-61028
1
Inverter cable
➄
2090-0959
1
Touch screen display, 8.4-inch, 4096 x 4096 pixels
➅
0515-0430
13
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 pan head
➆
0950-4482
1
Inverter board
➇
0515-0372
8
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8 pan head
➈
N5230-00017
1
Inverter board shield
➉
0515-1974
2
Machine screw, M2.5 x 4 pan head
11
0960-2796
1
Touch screen controller board
12
N5230-61002
1
Touch screen controller cable
13
N5230-60131
1
USB connector board
14
8160-1731
1
EMI gasket, D-shape, urethane, 4 mm W x 154 mm L
15
0400-0996
2
Grommet, oval, neoprene
6-10
Was N5230-20125
Was N5230-00013
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-3
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Front Panel Assembly, Back Side, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-11
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246
Reference
Designator
6-12
Part Number
Qty
Description
A4
0950-4599
1
Power supply assembly
A5
E8364-60187
1
Signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board
A6, A8
E8364-60182
2
Multiplier board
A7, A9
E8364-60189
2
Fractional-N synthesizer board
A10
E8364-60136
1
Frequency reference board
A14
N5230-60086
1
System motherboard
A15
E8364-60026
1
1.1 GHz CPU Board
B1
Fans
Refer to “Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on
page 6-38.
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-4
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Top Assemblies, All Options Except 146/246
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246
Reference
Designator
Typea
Part Number
Qty
W1
SR
N5230-20041
2
SR
N5230-20051
1
W2
W3
W4
Description
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board J106
to A6 multiplier board J100
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board J101
to A6 multiplier board J101
A6 multiplier board
to A20 mixer brick
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board J106
to A8 multiplier board J100
SR
N5230-20041
2
W6
SR
N5230-20077
1
A8 multiplier board
to A19 MASSQuad
W21
F
N5230-60016
1
A20 mixer brick (A) to A5 SPAM board J1
W22
F
N5230-60019
1
A20 mixer brick (B) to A5 SPAM board J2
W23
F
N5230-60020
1
A20 mixer brick (C) to A5 SPAM board J4
W24
F
N5230-60021
1
A20 mixer brick (D) to A5 SPAM board J5
W25
F
N5230-60022
1
A20 mixer brick (R) to A5 SPAM board J6
W5
W26
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board J101
to A8 multiplier board J101
Rear-panel 10 MHz REF. IN
to A10 frequency reference board J2
F
8120-5055
2
W28
F
N5230-60024
1
A10 frequency reference board J10
to A5 SPAM board J3
W29
F
N5230-60010
1
A10 frequency reference board J12
to A7 fractional-N synthesizer board J105
W30
F
N5230-60011
1
A10 frequency reference board J11
to A9 fractional-N synthesizer board J105
➀
40R
8121-0116
1
A3 front panel interface board J7
to A14 system motherboard J1
➁
100R
8121-0118
1
A14 system motherboard
to A16 test set motherboard
➂
50R
8121-0817
1
A41 hard disk drive assembly
to A15 CPU board
W27
A10 frequency reference board J3
to rear-panel 10 MHz REF. OUT
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
6-14
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-5
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-15
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Assemblies, Options 146/246
Reference
Designator
Qty
Description
A4
0950-4599
1
Power supply assembly
A5
E8364-60187
1
Signal processing ADC module (SPAM) board
A6, A8
E8364-60182
2
Multiplier board
A7, A9
E8364-60189
2
Fractional-N synthesizer board
A10
E8364-60136
1
Frequency reference board
A11
N5230-60084
1
Vertical motherboard
A12
N5230-60098
1
Multiplier board
A13
N5230-60097
1
Fractional-N synthesizer board
A14
N5230-60086
1
System motherboard
A15
E8364-60026
1
1.1 GHz CPU Board
A17
N5230-60085
1
QABC board
A18
5087-7294
1
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) (mounted on A17 QABC board)
A26
33321-60065
1
60-dB source step attenuator (mounted on A17 QABC board)
B1
Fans
Figure 6-6
6-16
Part Number
Refer to “Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on
page 6-38.
Top Assemblies, Options 146/246 (Side View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-7
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Top Assemblies, Options 146/246 (Top View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-17
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View)
Reference
Designator
Typea
Part Number
Qty
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board J106
to A6 multiplier board J100
W1
SR
N5230-20041
2
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board J101
to A6 multiplier board J101
W2
W3
Description
SR
N5230-20051
1
A6 multiplier board
to A20 mixer brick
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board J106
to A8 multiplier board J100
W4
SR
N5230-20041
2
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board J101
to A8 multiplier board J101
W5
W6
SR
N5230-20077
1
A8 multiplier board
to A19 MASSQuad
W21
F
N5230-60016
1
A20 mixer brick (A) to A5 SPAM board J1
W22
F
N5230-60019
1
A20 mixer brick (B) to A5 SPAM board J2
W23
F
N5230-60020
1
A20 mixer brick (C) to A5 SPAM board J4
W24
F
N5230-60021
1
A20 mixer brick (D) to A5 SPAM board J5
W25
F
N5230-60022
1
A20 mixer brick (R) to A5 SPAM board J6
Rear-panel 10 MHz REF. IN
to A10 frequency reference board J2
W26
F
8120-5055
2
A10 frequency reference board J3
to rear-panel 10 MHz REF. OUT
W27
W28
F
N5230-60024
1
A10 frequency reference board J10
to A5 SPAM board J3
W70
F
N5230-60039
1
A10 frequency reference board J11
to A17 QABC board J800
➀
40R
8121-0116
1
A3 front panel interface board J7 to A14 system
motherboard J1
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
6-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-8
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-19
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)
Reference
Designator
Typea
Part Number
Qty
Description
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board J106
to A12 multiplier board J100
W61
SR
N5230-20041
2
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board J101
to A12 multiplier board J101
W62
W63
SR
N5230-20096
1
A12 multiplier board to A18 MASSQuad
W64
SR
N5230-20091
1
A18 MASSQuad to front panel PORT 3 SOURCE OUT
W65
SR
N5230-20092
1
A18 MASSQuad to front panel PORT 4 SOURCE OUT
W67
SR
N5230-20095
1
A18 MASSQuad to A29 reference switch Port 2
W70
F
N5230-60039
1
A10 frequency reference J11 to A17 QABC board J800
W71
F
N5230-60040
1
A17 QABC board J801 to A7 fractional-N synthesizer J105
W72
F
N5230-60041
1
A17 QABC board J802 to A9 fractional-N synthesizer J105
W73
F
N5230-60042
1
A17 QABC board J803 to A13 fractional-N synthesizer J105
W74
F
N5230-60038
1
A17 QABC board J206 to A18 MASSQuad J23
W75
F
N5230-60037
1
A17 QABC board J204 to A18 MASSQuad J26
W76
10R
8121-0819
1
A17 QABC board P512 to A26 step attenuator
W77
26R
N5230-60027
1
A17 QABC board J4 to A18 MASSQuad J4
W78
SR
N5230-20089
1
A18 MASSQuad to A26 step attenuator
W79
SR
N5230-20090
1
A26 step attenuator to A18 MASSQuad
➀
40R
8121-0116
1
A3 front panel interface board J7 to A14 system motherboard J1
(Not visible in illustration; see page 6-15.)
➁
100R
8121-0118
1
A14 system motherboard to A16 test set motherboard
(See page 6-15 for more detailed illustration.)
➃
50R
8121-0817
1
A41 hard disk drive assembly to A15 CPU board
(See page 6-15 for more detailed illustration.)
➄
NA
1252-2219
1
Retainer clip for W77 A17J4 connection
➅
NA
1252-2216
1
Retainer clip for W76 A17P512 connection
➆
NA
1810-0118
2
50-ohm load (for unused A18 MASSQuad ports)
➇
NA
0515-0372
3
Machine screw M3.0 x 8 pan head
➈
NA
0515-2693
2
Machine screw M3.0 x 22 pan head
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
6-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-9
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Side View)
Figure 6-10
Top Cables, Options 146/246 (QABC Board)
Service Guide N5230-90025
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
6-21
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240
Reference
Designator
Part Numbera
Qty
Description
A16
N5230-60078
1
Test set motherboard
A19
5087-7294
5087-6294
1
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
1
Mixer brick (QuintBrick)
4
Test port 1 coupler
Test port 2 coupler
Test port 3 coupler
Test port 4 coupler
A20
5087-7822
5087-6822
Was 5087-7299
A21
A22
A23
A24
5087-7301
A41
Hard disk drive. Refer to “Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44.
➀
E8361-60059
1
USB hub board
a. Part numbers in italic typeface are for rebuilt exchange assemblies. Refer to “Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies” on page 6-5.
6-22
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-11
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Assemblies, Options 140 and 240
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-23
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Cables, Options 140 and 240
Reference
Designator
Typea
W3, W6
SR
Refer to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-14.
W7
SR
08753-20183
1
Jumper cable (A19 MASSQuad to A19 MASSQuad)
W8
SR
N5230-20054
1
A19 MASSQuad to A21 test port 1 coupler
W9
SR
N5230-20056
1
A19 MASSQuad to A22 test port 2 coupler
W10
SR
N5230-20058
1
A19 MASSQuad to A23 test port 3 coupler
W11
SR
N5230-20060
1
A19 MASSQuad to A24 test port 4 coupler
W12
SR
N5230-20062
1
A19 MASSQuad to A20 mixer brick (R)
W13
SR
N5230-20055
1
A21 test port 1 coupler to A20 mixer brick (A)
W14
SR
N5230-20057
1
A22 test port 2 coupler to A20 mixer brick (B)
W15
SR
N5230-20059
1
A23 test port 3 coupler to A20 mixer brick (C)
W16
SR
N5230-20061
1
A24 test port 4 coupler to A20 mixer brick (D)
W21-W25
F
Refer to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-14.
W31
F
N5230-60025
1
A19 MASSQuad J26
to A16 test set motherboard J204 (R)
W32
F
N5230-60026
1
A19 MASSQuad J23
to A16 test set motherboard J206 (MASS)
➀
100R
8121-0118
1
A14 system motherboard
to A16 test set motherboard
➁
50R
8121-0817
1
A41 hard disk drive
to A15 CPU board
➂
4W
N5320-60028
1
Front panel LED board J1
to A16 test set motherboard J501
➃
6W
N5230-60015
1
USB hub board J3
to A14 system motherboard J20
➄
26R
N5230-60027
1
A19 MASSQuad J4
to A16 test set motherboard J4
➅
16R
N5230-60013
1
A20 mixer brick J1
to A16 test set motherboard J12
Part Number
Qty
Description
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
6-24
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-12
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Cables, Options 140 and 240
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-25
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245
Reference
Designator
Part Numbera
Qty
Description
A16
N5230-60078
1
Test set motherboard
A19
5087-7294
5087-6294
1
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
1
Mixer brick (QuintBrick)
A20
5087-7822
5087-6822
Was 5087-7299
A21
A22
A23
A24
5087-7301
4
Test port 1 coupler
Test port 2 coupler
Test port 3 coupler
Test port 4 coupler
A25
33321-60065
1
Source 60-dB step attenuator
A41
Hard disk drive. Refer to “Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44.
➀
E8361-60059
1
USB hub board
a. Part numbers in italic typeface are for rebuilt exchange assemblies. Refer to “Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies” on page 6-5.
6-26
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-13
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Assemblies, Options 145 and 245
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-27
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Cables, Options 145 and 245
Reference
Designator
Typea
W3, W6
SR
Refer to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-14.
W21-W25
F
Refer to “Top Cables, All Options Except 146/246” on page 6-14.
W31
F
N5230-60025
1
A19 MASSQuad J26 to A16 test set motherboard J204 (R)
W32
F
N5230-60026
1
A19 MASSQuad J23 to A16 test set motherboard J206 (MASS)
W40
SR
N5230-20064
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 1 SOURCE OUT
W41
SR
N5230-20067
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 2 SOURCE OUT
W42
SR
N5230-20069
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 3 SOURCE OUT
W43
SR
N5230-20071
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 4 SOURCE OUT
Part Number
Qty
W44
W45
W46
PORT 1 CPLR THRU to A21 test port 1 coupler
SR
N5230-20063
4
W47
W48
W51
PORT 2 CPLR THRU to A22 test port 2 coupler
PORT 3 CPLR THRU to A23 test port 3 coupler
PORT 4 CPLR THRU to A24 test port 4 coupler
SR
N5230-20075
1
W49
W50
Description
A19 MASSQuad (R) to REFERENCE SOURCE OUT
A21 test port 1 coupler to PORT 1 CPLR ARM
SR
N5230-20065
4
W52
A22 test port 2 coupler to PORT 2 CPLR ARM
A23 test port 3 coupler to PORT 3 CPLR ARM
A24 test port 4 coupler to PORT 4 CPLR ARM
W53
SR
N5230-20066
1
PORT 1 RCVR A IN to A20 mixer brick (A)
W54
SR
N5230-20068
1
PORT 2 RCVR B IN to A20 mixer brick (B)
W55
SR
N5230-20070
1
PORT 3 RCVR C IN to A20 mixer brick (C)
W56
SR
N5230-20072
1
PORT 4 RCVR D IN to A20 mixer brick (D)
W57
SR
N5230-20076
1
REFERENCE RCVR IN to A20 mixer brick (R)
W58
SR
N5230-20073
1
A19 MASSQuad (ATTN) to A25 step attenuator
W59
SR
N5230-20074
1
A25 step attenuator to A19 MASSQuad (ATTN)
W60
SR
E8356-20072
9
Front panel jumper
100R
8121-0118
1
A14 system motherboard J8 to A16 test set motherboard J1
50R
8121-0817
1
A41 hard disk drive to A15 CPU board
4W
N5320-60028
1
Front panel LED board J1 to A16 test set motherboard J501
6W
N5230-60015
1
USB hub board J3 to A14 system motherboard J20
26R
N5230-60027
1
A19 MASSQuad J4 to A16 test set motherboard J4
16R
N5230-60013
1
A20 mixer brick J1 to A16 test set motherboard J12
10R
8121-0819
1
A25 step attenuator to A16 test set motherboard P510 (ATTN)
➀
➁
➂
➃
➄
➅
➆
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
6-28
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-14
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Cables, Options 145 and 245
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-29
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246
Reference
Designator
Part Numbera
Qty
A16
N5230-60078
A17
Refer to “Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16.
A18
Refer to “Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16.
A19
5087-7294
5087-6294
A20
5087-7822
5087-6822
1
Description
Test set motherboard
1
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
1
Mixer brick (QuintBrick)
Was 5087-7299
A21
A22
A23
A24
5087-7301
4
Test port 1 coupler
Test port 2 coupler
Test port 3 coupler
Test port 4 coupler
A25
33321-60065
1
Source 60-dB step attenuator
A26
Refer to “Top Assemblies, Options 146/246” on page 6-16.
A29
5087-7714
A41
Hard disk drive. Refer to “Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options” on page 6-44.
➀
E8361-60059
1
USB hub board
➁
N9356-60001
1
Limiter
➂
1250-3478
1
DC block
➃
1810-0118
2
50-ohm load (for unused A19 MASSQuad ports)
1
Reference switch—with wiring harness
a. Part numbers in italic typeface are for rebuilt exchange assemblies. Refer to “Rebuilt-Exchange Assemblies” on page 6-5.
6-30
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-15
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Assemblies, Options 146 and 246
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-31
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Cables, Options 146 and 246
Reference
Designator
Typea
W3, W6
SR
Refer to “Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View)” on page 6-18.
W21-W25
F
Refer to “Top Cables, Options 146/246 (Top View)” on page 6-18.
W31
F
N5230-60025
1
A19 MASSQuad J26 to A16 test set motherboard J204 (R)
W32
F
N5230-60026
1
A19 MASSQuad J23 to A16 test set motherboard J206 (MASS)
W40
SR
N5230-20064
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 1 SOURCE OUT
W41
SR
N5230-20067
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 2 SOURCE OUT
W42
SR
N5230-20069
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 3 SOURCE OUT
W43
SR
N5230-20071
1
A19 MASSQuad to PORT 4 SOURCE OUT
Part Number
Qty
W44
W45
W46
PORT 1 CPLR THRU to A21 test port 1 coupler
SR
N5230-20063
4
W47
W48
W51
SR
N5230-20075
1
PORT 3 CPLR THRU to A23 test port 3 coupler
A19 MASSQuad (R) to REFERENCE SOURCE OUT
A21 test port 1 coupler to PORT 1 CPLR ARM
SR
N5230-20065
4
W52
A22 test port 2 coupler to PORT 2 CPLR ARM
A23 test port 3 coupler to PORT 3 CPLR ARM
A24 test port 4 coupler to PORT 4 CPLR ARM
W53
SR
N5230-20066
1
PORT 1 RCVR A IN to A20 mixer brick (A)
W54
SR
N5230-20068
1
PORT 2 RCVR B IN to A20 mixer brick (B)
W55
SR
N5230-20070
1
PORT 3 RCVR C IN to A20 mixer brick (C)
W56
SR
N5230-20072
1
PORT 4 RCVR D IN to A20 mixer brick (D)
W58
SR
N5230-20073
1
A19 MASSQuad (ATTN) to A25 step attenuator
W59
SR
N5230-20074
1
A25 step attenuator to A19 MASSQuad (ATTN)
W60
SR
E8356-20072
9
Front panel jumper
W64
SR
N5230-20091
1
A18 MASSQuad to PORT 3 SOURCE OUT
W65
SR
N5230-20092
1
A18 MASSQuad to PORT 4 SOURCE OUT
W66
SR
N5230-20094
1
A19 MASSQuad to A29 reference switch port 1
W67
SR
N5230-20095
1
A19 MASSQuad to A29 reference switch port 2
W68
SR
N5230-20100
1
A29 reference switch center port to limiter
W69
SR
N5230-20093
1
DC block to front panel REFERENCE SOURCE OUT
W80
SR
N5230-20097
1
REFERENCE RCVR IN to A20 mixer brick (R)
100R
8121-0118
1
A14 system motherboard J8 to A16 test set motherboard J1
50R
8121-0817
1
A41 hard disk drive to A15 CPU board
4W
N5320-60028
1
Front panel LED board J1 to A16 test set motherboard J501
6W
N5230-60015
1
USB hub board J3 to A14 system motherboard J20
➀
➁
➂
➃
6-32
PORT 2 CPLR THRU to A22 test port 2 coupler
PORT 4 CPLR THRU to A24 test port 4 coupler
W49
W50
Description
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Reference
Designator
➄
➅
➆
Typea
Part Number
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Qty
Description
26R
N5230-60027
1
A19 MASSQuad J4 to A16 test set motherboard J4
16R
N5230-60013
1
A20 mixer brick J1 to A16 test set motherboard J12
10R
8121-0819
1
A25 step attenuator to A16 test set motherboard P510 (ATTN)
a. SR = semirigid coaxial cable; F = flexible coaxial cable; nR = n wires in a ribbon (flat) cable; nW = n wires in a wrapped cable
Figure 6-16
Bottom Cables, Options 146 and 246
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-33
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Reference
Designator
Qty
Description
Refer to “Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options” on
page 6-38.
B1
Fans
➀
5022-6134
1
Cable hold down wire
➁
N5230-20040
1
Ejector block
➂
0515-0374
6
Machine screw, M3.0 x 10, pan head (2 for ejector block ➁ and four
➃
E8356-40001
1
Air flow plenum
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6, pan head (5 for A4 power supply, 3 for
plenum ➃, 6 for A11 vertical motherboard, and 2 for plenum bracket
for A14 system motherboard)
➄
0515-0372
16
➅
E8356-00033
1
Plenum bracket
➆
1440-0421
2
U-handle, finger grip (1 for hard disk drive, 1 for CPU board)
➇
0515-1753
2
Machine screw, with patch lock, M3.0 x 8, pan head (for cable hold
down wire ➀ and plenum bracket ➅) (Options 146 and 246 only)
➈
3050-0891
2
Washer, flat (for patch lock screw ➇) (Options 146 and 246 only)
Figure 6-17
6-34
Part Number
➅ and cable hold down wire ➀ (except Option 246)
Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options (Side View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-18
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Top Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options (Top View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-35
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Reference
Designator
Part Number
Qty
Description
➀
E8361-60059
1
USB hub board
➁
0515-1934
2
Machine screw M2.5 x 6 (for mounting USB hub board ➀)
➂
0515-0430
6
Machine screw M3.0 x 6 pan head (2 for front panel LED board ➆ and 4
➃
0515-0372
22
Machine screw M3.0 x 8 pan head (3 for A19 MASSQuad, 3 for MASSQuad
block ➈, and 4 each for coupler blocks ➇)
➄
0515-0374
2
Machine screw M3.0 x 10 pan head (for mounting A25 step attenuator)
➅
N5230-20080
4
Coupler blocks (for mounting A21–A24 couplers)
➆
0515-2012
16
Machine screw M3.5 x 25 pan head (4 each for A21–A24 couplers)
➇
N5230-60079
1
Front-panel LED board
➈
N5230-20053
1
MASSQuad block (for mounting A19 MASSQuad)
➉
N5230-00007
1
Reference switch mounting bracket
0515-1227
3
Machine screw M3.0 x 6 flat head (for mounting reference switch
mounting bracket)
12
0515-1992
2
Machine screw M2.5 x 20 pan head (for mounting reference switch)
13
1400-0249
1
Cable tie (to attach limiter to cable tie mount)
14
1400-1626
1
Cable tie mount (for mounting the limiter)
15
0515-0664
4
Machine screw M3.0 x 12 pan head (for A16 test set motherboard)
16
E8364-00007
1
Hard disk drive shield, stationary bracket
11
6-36
for A20 mixer brick)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-19
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Bottom Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-37
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Reference
Designator
Part Number
Qty
Description
B1
3160-1085
3
Fan
➀
E8356-00014
1
Hard disk drive cable interface board bracket
➁
E8356-60024
1
Hard disk drive cable interface board
➂
0515-1227
10
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 flat head (2 to attach ➁ to ➀, 8 to attach ➇
➃
0515-0372
6
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head (2 to attach ➀ to CPU board cover, 4
➄
E8356-00027
1
Chassis assembly
➅
N5230-00003
1
Test set deck
➆
N5230-20081
4
Test port coupler dress nut
➇
N5230-00004
1
Test set deck front panel
➈
P/O RF cable
18
3.5 mm (f) bulkhead connectors
➉
P/O RF cable
18
Washer (for bulkhead connectors, ➈)
P/O RF cable
18
Hex nut (for bulkhead connectors, ➈)
12
E8356-40004
1
Line switch button
13
1460-2632
1
Line switch spring
14
N5230-60043
1
Midweb assembly (includes three fans, B1)
15
E8364-00021
1
Clamp, ribbon cable
16
0515-0374
1
Machine screw M3.0 x 10, pan head (for cable clamp, 15 )
11
6-38
to ➅)
to attach 14 to ➄)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-20
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Internal Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-39
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Reference
Designator
Qty
Description
➀
N5230-00018
1
Inner cover
➁
N5230-40001
3
Retainer block (foam pad) on inside of inner cover
(Options 146 and 246 only)
➂
0515-1227
➃
N5230-00011
1
Outer cover
➄
5041-9611
4
Rear feet
➅
0515-1619
4
Machine screw M4.0 x 25, pan head
➆
E4400-60026
2
Strap handle assembly (includes item ➇)
➇
0515-0372
7
Machine screw M3.0 x 8,pan head
➈
0515-0710
4
Machine screw M5.0 x 18, flat head
10
5041-9167
4
Bottom feet
5021-2840
4
Key lock (for securing bottom foot)
5041-9183
2
With handles—front handle side trim
5041-9174
2
Without handles—trim strip, filler
12
5063-9205
2
Front handle
13
E8361-20067
2
Clip, retainer (Options 146 and 246 only)
14
0515-1644
2
Machine screw M3.0 x 12, flat head (for retainer clip, item 13 )
11
6-40
Part Number
4 or 5
Machine screw M3.0 x 6, flat head
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-21
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
External Hardware and Miscellaneous Parts, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-41
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Rear Panel Assembly, All Options
Item Number
Part
Number
Qty
Description
➀
E8364-60023
1
Rear frame assembly (includes items ➁ – ➆)
➁
E8356-00023
1
Cover plate, large
➂
6960-0149
5
Hole plug
➃
0515-0372
33
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8, pan head
➄
8120-5055
2
BNC cable assembly
➅
2950-0035
4
Hex nut (for BNC connector, ➄ and ➇)
➆
2190-0102
4
Lock washer (for BNC connector, ➄ and ➇)
➇
8120-5027
2
BNC cable assembly
➈
E8356-00022
1
Cover plate, digital section
➉
0515-0374
9
Machine screw, M3.0 x 10, pan head (to secure item 11 )
11
N5230-00002
1
Test set motherboard rear panel (P/O A16)
12
85047-60005
2
Fuse holder (includes wire harness, nut, and washer)a
13
1400-0112
2
Fuse holder cap
14
E8364-60095
1
Hard disk drive stationary board with mating connector
15
1440-0421
2
U-handle, finger grip (1 for hard disk drive and 1 for CPU board)
16
0515-1227
4
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6, flat head (for U-handles, 16 )
17
0515-1410
2
Machine screw, M3.0 x 20, pan head (to secure item 14 )
18
8121-0834
1
HANDLER I/O cable assembly
not shown
0380-4670
--
Jackscrew, to secure multipin cable connectors to rear panel
not shown
1251-7812
--
Jackscrew, to secure multipin cable connectors to rear panel
a. See page 6-48 for the part number of the fuses.
6-42
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-22
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Rear Panel Assembly, All Options
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-43
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Hard Disk Drive Assembly, All Options
Parallel ATA Interface
Every PNA shipped prior to January 2009 contains the parallel ATA interface for the hard disk drive (HDD).
Starting January 2009, every PNA shipped contains the serial ATA interface for the HDD. The table below
lists the contents of the HDD with the parallel ATA interface.
Ref. Desig.
Part Number
Qty
Description
Hard disk drive assembly kit with programmed hard disk drive (HDD)
(Includes A41 and items ➀ through ➆, pre-assembled.)
N8982Aa Kit (for
1.1 GHz CPU
board)
A41
N5230-60048
1
Programmed hard disk drive
➀
E8364-20118
1
Hard disk drive bracket
➁
0515-0664
4
Machine screw, M3.0 x 12 pan head
➂
0515-0372
2
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8 pan head
➃
0340-1525
8
Bushing
➄
E8364-60094
1
Hard disk drive board
➅
1440-0421
1
U-handle, finger grip
➆
0515-1227
2
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 flathead (for U-handle)
a. All new N8982A assemblies will be shipped with serial ATA hard drives and associated hardware.
6-44
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-23.
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Hard Disk Drive Assembly (Parallel ATA Interface)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-45
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Serial ATA Interface
Every PNA shipped prior to January 2009 contains the parallel ATA interface for the hard disk drive (HDD).
Starting January 2009, every PNA shipped contains the serial ATA interface for the hard disk drive (HDD).
The table below lists the contents of the HDD with the serial ATA interface.
Ref. Desig.
Part Number
Qty
N8982A Kit (for
1.1 GHz CPU
board)
6-46
Description
Hard disk drive assembly kit with programmed hard disk drive (HDD)
(Includes A41 and items ➀ through «, pre-assembled.)
A41
N5230-60050
1
Programmed hard disk drive
➀
E8364-20118
1
Hard disk drive bracket
➁
0515-0664
4
Machine screw, M3.0 x 12 pan head
➂
0515-0372
2
Machine screw, M3.0 x 8 pan head
➃
E8361-20069
4
Bushing
➄
E8361-63125
1
Hard disk drive board
➅
1440-0421
1
U-handle, finger grip
➆
0515-1227
2
Machine screw, M3.0 x 6 flathead (for U-handle)
➇
E8361-20068
1
Nylon spacer
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 6-24
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Hard Disk Drive Assembly (Serial ATA Interface)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6-47
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Miscellaneous Part Numbers
Table 6-3
Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories
Model or Part
Number
Description
Service Tools
Extender board, synthesizer/reference
E8356-60021
1/4 inch and 5/16 inch open-end wrench, thin profile
8710-0510
5/16 inch (8 mm), open-end torque wrench; 0.9 N-m (8 in-lb)
8710-1765
20 mm open-end torque wrench; 0.9 N-m (8 in-lb)
8710-1764
Spanner wrench
08513-20014
Documentation
Installation and Quick Start Guide (for all PNA analyzers) (Cannot be ordered. Part number is
for reference only. Must be printed from the Agilent Web site. Refer to “Printing Copies of
Documentation from the Web” on page iv.)
E8356-90001
Service Guide. (Not available in printed form. Part number is for reference only. Must be
printed from the Agilent Web site. Refer to “Printing Copies of Documentation from the Web”
on page iv.)
N5230-90024
Protective Caps for Connectors
Protective cap for GPIB connector
1252-5007
Protective cap for Test Set I/O connector
1252-1935
Protective cap for Aux I/O connector
1252-4691
Protective cap for Handler I/O connector
1253-5320
Protective cap for Display (VGA) connector
1252-0220
Protective cap for Serial (RS-232) connector
1252-3422
Protective cap for Parallel (1284-C) connector
1252-1935
GPIB Cables/GPIB Adapter
GPIB cable, 0.5 meter (1.6 feet)
10833D
GPIB cable, 1 meter (3.3 feet)
10833A
GPIB cable, 2 meter (6.6 feet)
10833B
GPIB cable, 4 meter (13.2 feet)
10833C
GPIB cable to GPIB cable adapter
10834A
Battery
Battery, lithium, 3V, 0.22A-HR (located on the A15 CPU board)
1420-0356
Fuses
Rear Panel Bias Input Fuse Port 1, Port 2 (0.5 A, 125 V) (Option UNL)
6-48
2110-0046
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 6-3
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories (Continued)
Description
Model or Part
Number
ESD Supplies
Adjustable antistatic wrist strap
9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap grounding cord (5 foot length)
9300-0980
Static control table mat and earth ground wire
9300-0797
ESD heel strap
9300-1126
EMI/RFI Shielding Accessories
7 mm ferrite bead for serial cable
9170-1793
9 mm ferrite bead for parallel port
9170-1702
Upgrade Kits
Time Domain (Option 010)
N5230CU-010
Frequency Offset Mode (Option 080)
N5230CU-080
Add built-in performance test software for Agilent inclusive calibration perpetual license
(Option897)
N5230CU-897
Add built-in performance test software for standards compliant calibration perpetual license
(Option898)
N5230CU-898
13.5 GHz or 20 GHz Standard Test Set to Configurable Test Set with Extended Power Range
(Option 140 to 145 or 240 to 245)
N5230CU-926
Add Second Source to 13.5 GHz Configurable Test Set with Extended Power Range
(Option 145 to 146)
N5230CU-928
Add Second Source to 20 GHz Configurable Test Set with Extended Power Range
(Option 245 to 246)
N5230CU-927
Frequency Extension, 13.5 to 20 GHz
(Option 140 to 240 or 145 to 245)
N5230CU-966
USB Accessories
Mouse
1150-7799
Keyboard (U.S. style)
1150-7896
Rack Mount Kits and Handle Kits
Rack mount kit for use with standard supplied front handles (Option 1CP)
Rack mount flange for use with front handles (two included in 5063-9237)
Rack mount kit for use without front handles (Option 1CM)
Rack mount flange for use without front handles (two included in 1CM042A)
Front handle kit (two handles and hardware)
5063-9237
5022-2809
1CM042A
Was 5063-9217
5022-2802
5063-9230
Front handle (two included in 5063-9230)
5063-9205
Rack mount rail set
E3663AC
Touch-up Paint
Dove gray (for use on frame around front panel and painted portion of handles)
Service Guide N5230-90025
6010-1146
6-49
Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts Listings
Table 6-3
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Part Numbers for Miscellaneous Parts and Accessories (Continued)
Description
Model or Part
Number
French gray (for use on cover)
6010-1147
Parchment white (for use on rack mount flanges, rack support flanges, and front panels)
6010-1148
6-50
Service Guide N5230-90025
7
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-1
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of your Agilent
Technologies PNA series microwave network analyzer.
Chapter Seven at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Personal Safety Warnings
Warnings and cautions pertaining to personal safety.
Page 7-3
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Protection
Information pertaining to ESD protection.
Page 7-3
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The proper assembly replacement sequence for your
analyzer.
Page 7-4
Table of Removal and Replacement
Procedures
A table of removal and replacement procedures and the
corresponding page number where they are located.
Page 7-4
Removal and Replacement Procedures
The actual procedures for removing and replacing the
major assemblies in your analyzer.
See Table 7-1
on page 7-4
for specific
procedures.
The procedures occur in assembly reference designator
numerical order.
Post-Repair Procedures
7-2
A table for the proper tests, verifications, and
adjustments to perform on your analyzer after repair.
Page 7-58
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Personal Safety Warnings
Personal Safety Warnings
WARNING
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid electrical
shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
WARNING
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages.
Disconnect the analyzer from all voltage sources while it is being opened.
WARNING
Procedures described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the
product while protective covers are removed. Energy available at many points may, if
contacted, result in personal injury.
WARNING
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds
after disconnecting the plug from its power supply assembly. Wait at least 10 seconds,
after disconnecting the plug, before removing the covers.
WARNING
The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the
mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument. The front panel
switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended. Discard used batteries according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Protection
CAUTION
Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Perform the following procedures only at a static-safe workstation and
wear a grounded wrist strap.
This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge can seriously
damage your analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the recommendations outlined
in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on page 1-6, for all of the procedures in this chapter.
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-3
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Assembly Replacement Sequence
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence that you should follow to replace an assembly in the network
analyzer.
Step 1. Identify the faulty group. Begin with Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting.”
Step 2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 6, “Replaceable Parts.”
Step 3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
“Post-Repair Procedures” in this chapter.
Step 4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Step 5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments.”
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Table 7-1
List of Procedures
Reference
Designator
Assembly Description
Location
None
Battery
Page 7-56
None
Covers, outer and inner
Page 7-6
None
Front panel USB connector board
Page 7-12
None
Touchscreen controller board
Page 7-10
None
Touchscreen display assembly
Page 7-13
None
Display inverter board
Page 7-10
None
DC block (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-44
None
Front panel assembly
Page 7-8
None
Limiter (Options 146 and 246)
None
Midweb and fans
Page 7-44
Page 7-53
None
Plenum bracket
Page 7-16
None
USB hub board (part of A16 test set motherboard procedure)
A1
A2
A3
Keypad assembly
Display assembly
Front panel interface board
Page 7-28
Page 7-10
A4
Power supply assembly
Page 7-14
A5
A6, A8
A7, A9
A10
SPAM board
Multiplier boards
Fractional-N synthesizer boards
Frequency reference board
Page 7-16
A11
Vertical motherboard (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-18
7-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 7-1
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Assembly Replacement Sequence
List of Procedures (Continued)
Reference
Designator
Assembly Description
Location
A12
A13
Multiplier board (Options 146 and 246)
Fractional-N synthesizer board (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-20
A14
System motherboard
Page 7-22
A15
CPU board
Page 7-24
A16
Test set motherboard
Page 7-28
A17
QABC board (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-30
A18
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-32
A19
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
Mixer brick (QuintBrick)
Page 7-34
Page 7-36
Test port 1 coupler
Test port 2 coupler
Test port 3 coupler
Test port 4 coupler
Page 7-38
A25
60-dB source step attenuator (Option 1E1)
Page 7-40
A26
60-dB source step attenuator (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-42
A29
Reference switch (Options 146 and 246)
Page 7-44
A40
Not used.
A41
Hard disk drive
Service Guide N5230-90025
Page 7-46
7-5
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing the Covers
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing the Covers
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
Removing the Outer Cover
CAUTION
This procedure is best performed with the analyzer resting on its front handles in the vertical
position. Do not place the analyzer on its front panel without the handles. This will damage
the front panel assemblies.
Refer to Figure 7-1. for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. With a T-20 TORX driver, remove the strap handles (item ①) by loosening the screws (item ➁) on both
ends until the handle is free of the analyzer.
3. With a T-20 TORX driver, remove the four rear panel feet (item ③) by removing the center screws (item
④).
4. Slide the four bottom feet (item ⑤) off the cover.
5. Slide the cover off of the frame.
Removing the Inner Cover
Refer to Figure 7-1. for this procedure.
1. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the cover attachment screws (item ⑥). Some of these screws are flat
head and some are pan head. Note the locations of each type for reinstallation.
2. Options 146 and 246 only: With a T-10 TORX driver, loosen the screws on the two retainer clips (item ⑦).
3. Lift off the cover.
Replacement Procedure
Reverse the order of the removal procedures.
For Options 146 and 246: Be sure that the cover is located behind the two retainer clips (item ⑦) before
installing the cover screws (item ⑥). Remember to tighten the retainer clip screws. The retainer clips may
rotate slightly when the screws are tightened; this is normal and acceptable.
7-6
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-1.
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing the Covers
Outer and Inner Cover Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-7
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-2 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. With a 5/16 inch torque wrench, remove all the semirigid jumpers (item ①) from the front panel (Option
014 only).
4. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the eight screws (item ➁) from the sides of the frame.
CAUTION
Before removing the front panel from the analyzer, lift and support the front of the analyzer
frame.
5. Slide the front panel over the test port connectors.
6. Disconnect the front panel interface ribbon cable (item ③).
The front panel is now free from the analyzer.
Replacement Procedure
CAUTION
When replacing the front panel, be sure to align the power switch to its corresponding front
panel cutout.
IMPORTANT
When reconnecting semirigid cables, torque the cable connectors to 10 in-lb.
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-2
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly
Front Panel Assembly Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-9
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Refer to Figure 7-3 for the following procedures.
Pre-replacement Procedure
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly” on page
7-8.
Replacing the Inverter Board
1. Remove the inverter board shield by removing the two retaining screws (item ①).
2. Disconnect the two A2 display cables (item ➁) from the inverter board.
3. Disconnect the inverter cable (item ③) from the inverter board.
4. Remove the two retaining screws (item ④) from the inverter board.
5. Remove the inverter board from the front panel assembly.
6. Install the new inverter board by reversing the removal instructions.
7. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Replacing the Touch Screen Controller Board
1. Disconnect the touch screen display cable (item ⑤) from the touch screen controller board.
2. Disconnect the touch screen controller cable (item ⑥) from the touch screen controller board. NOTE THAT THE
CABLE CONNECTS TO THE UPPER FIVE PINS ON THE CONTROLLER BOARD CONNECTOR. THIS IS
IMPORTANT FOR RE-INSTALLATION. Refer to Figure 7-4 on page 7-13 for an illustration of the cable and
connector.
3. Remove the two retaining screws (item ⑦) from the touch screen controller board.
4. Remove the touch screen controller board from the front panel assembly.
5. Install the new touch screen controller board by reversing the removal instructions.
6. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-10
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies
Replacing the A2 Display Assembly
1. Remove the inverter board. Refer to procedure on page 7-10. Remove the inverter cable from the cable
clamp (item ⑧).
1. Remove the touch screen controller board. Refer to above procedure.
2. Remove the six retaining screws (item ⑨) from the A2 display assembly.
3. Remove the A2 display assembly from the front panel assembly.
4. Install the new A2 display assembly by reversing the removal instructions.
5. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Figure 7-3
Front Panel Subassemblies Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-11
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Replacing the USB Connector Board
1. Remove the two retaining screws (item ⑩) from the USB connector board.
2. Carefully unplug the USB connector board from the A3 front panel interface board and remove it from the
front panel assembly
3. Install the new USB controller board by reversing the removal instructions.
4. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Replacing the A3 Front Panel Interface Board
1. Remove the round knob (RPG) from the front panel by gently pulling the knob forward.
2. Disconnect the inverter cable (item ③) from the A3 front panel interface board.
3. Disconnect the touch screen controller cable (item ⑥) from the A3 front panel interface board.
4. Remove the USB connector board. Refer to previous procedure.
5. Remove the nine retaining screws (item 11 ) from the A3 front panel interface board.
6. Remove the A3 front panel interface board from the front panel assembly.
7. Note how the A1 keypad assembly is attached to the A3 front panel interface board to aid in installing it
on the new A3 front panel interface board.
8. Carefully remove the A1 keypad assembly from the A3 front panel interface board.
9. Install the A1 keypad assembly on the new A3 front panel interface board.
10. Reinstall the A3 front panel interface board by removing the removal instructions.
11. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Replacing the A1 Keypad Assembly
1. Remove the A3 front panel interface board as instructed above.
2. Note how the A1 keypad assembly is attached to the A3 front panel interface board to aid in installing
the new one.
3. Carefully remove the A1 keypad assembly from the A3 front panel interface board.
4. Install the new A1 keypad assembly on the A3 front panel interface board.
5. Reinstall the A3 front panel interface board by reversing the removal instructions.
6. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-12
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing Front Panel Subassemblies
Replacing the Touch Screen Display Assembly
1. Refer to Figure 7-3 and Figure 7-4 for this procedure.
2. Remove the A2 display assembly. Refer to the procedure on page 7-11.
3. Note the orientation of the touch screen display in the front panel frame. THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT. THE
NEW ONE MUST BE INSTALLED IN EXACTLY THE SAME ORIENTATION. Refer to Figure 7-4.
4. Carefully lift the touch screen display and remove it from the front panel assembly.
5. Note the orientation of the rubber boot surrounding the touch screen display. THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT.
THE BOOT MUST BE REINSTALLED EXACTLY AS IT WAS.
6. Remove the protective cover from the new touch screen then remove the rubber boot from the old touch
screen and install it on the new touch screen. Refer to Figure 7-4.
7. Install the new touch screen display and the A2 display by reversing the removal instructions. Refer to Figure 7-4.
REMEMBER, THE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER CABLE CONNECTS TO THE UPPER FIVE PINS ON THE
CONTROLLER BOARD CONNECTOR.
8. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this
replacement procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Figure 7-4
Touch Screen Display and Rubber Boot Installation
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-13
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply Assembly
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply Assembly
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-5 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the five screws (item ①) from the power supply assembly.
4. Lift out and remove the A4 power supply assembly.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-14
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-5
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply Assembly
A4 Power Supply Assembly Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-15
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-6 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the cable hold down wire that secures cables to the top of the midweb
by removing the attachment screw (item ①).
4. Remove any or all of the A5 through A10 boards:
a. Identify the board you want to remove and disconnect any cables that are attached to it.
NOTE
Before removing the board completely, check the bottom of the board for any attached
cables and disconnect them.
b. While holding onto the extractors (item ➁), slide the board out of the slot and remove it from the
analyzer.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. When reinstalling the cable hold down wire, be sure that all
cables are positioned so that they will not be pinched.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-16
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-6
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A5 through A10 Boards
A5 through A10 Board Assemblies Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-17
Repair and Replacement Procedures
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Removing and Replacing the A11 Vertical Motherboard and the Plenum Bracket
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A11 Vertical Motherboard and the Plenum Bracket
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-7 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the A12 multiplier and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards. Refer to “Removing and Replacing
the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
4. Remove the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board” on page 7-30.
5. Remove the A11 vertical motherboard:
a. Remove the six mounting screws (item ①) from the A11 vertical motherboard.
b. Lift the A11 vertical motherboard out of the A14 system motherboard connector and remove it from
the analyzer.
6. Remove the plenum bracket:
a. Remove the two screws (item ➁) holding the plenum bracket in place.
b. Remove the plenum bracket from the analyzer.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. If the plenum bracket was removed, reinstall it first and
leave the attachment screws loose until the A11 vertical motherboard has been securely fastened.
Use the tools specified for all mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Repair and Replacement Procedures
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A11 Vertical Motherboard and the Plenum Bracket
Figure 7-7
A11 Vertical Motherboard and Plenum Bracket Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-19
Repair and Replacement Procedures
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Removing and Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N
Synthesizer Boards
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-8 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. The A13 fractional-N synthesizer board must be removed before the A12 multiplier board can be
removed.
4. Remove the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board:
a. Disconnect cable W73 from the A17 QABC board. This cable is attached to the bottom of the A13
fractional-N synthesizer board.
b. Remove jumper cables W61 and W62 and slide the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board out of the
analyzer being careful not to damage any adjacent components.
5. Remove the A12 multiplier board:
a. Disconnect cable W63 and, while holding this cable out of the way, slide the A12 multiplier board out
of the analyzer. Be careful not to over bend the W63 cable.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. Be especially careful not to damage cable W63.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Repair and Replacement Procedures
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards
Figure 7-8
A12 Multiplier and A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-21
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-9 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly” on
page 7-8.
4. Remove the A4 power supply assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply
Assembly” on page 7-14.
5. Remove the A5 through A10 boards and the plenum bracket. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A5
through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
6. Remove the A12 multiplier and A13 fractional-N synthesizer boards. Refer to “Removing and Replacing
the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
7. Remove the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board” on page 7-30.
8. Remove the A11 vertical motherboard. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A11 Vertical Motherboard
and the Plenum Bracket” on page 7-18.
9. Remove the A15 CPU board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board” on page 7-24.
10. Remove the Midweb. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan” on page 7-53.
11. Remove the ribbon cable clamp (item ⑧) by removing the attachment screw (item ⑨). Set the cable
clamp aside for reinstallation later.
12. Disconnect the front panel ribbon cable (item ①), the USB hub assembly cable (item ➁), and the test
set motherboard ribbon cable (item ③) from the A14 system motherboard.
13. Remove the remaining three screws (item ④) that secure the A14 system motherboard.
14. Remove the power switch push button (item ⑤) and spring (item ⑥).
15. Slide the A14 system motherboard toward the front of the analyzer to release the hold-down pins (item
⑦) and lift the motherboard out of the analyzer.
7-22
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A14 System Motherboard
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Figure 7-9
A14 System Motherboard Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-23
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-10 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) ribbon cable and interface board from the A15 CPU
board by removing the two screws (item ①).
3. Disengage the A5 SPAM board from the A15 CPU board by performing the following steps.
a. Lift the two extractors located at each end of the board.
b. While holding onto the extractors, lift the board halfway out of the slot.
c. Let the extractors drop to their normal position.
d. Lower the board into the slot.
The board should now rest above its normal seated position.
4. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the 14 screws (item ➁) from the rear panel of the A15 CPU board.
5. Gently pull on the finger grip (item ③) to disengage the A15 CPU board from the analyzer.
6. Slide the A15 CPU board out of the analyzer.
7-24
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board
Replacement Procedure
NOTE: If not already done, install a jumper between pins 9 and 10 on connector J11. See the following
illustration for the J11 pin configuration. There should already be a jumper between pins 5 and 6.
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all mounting screws.
2. If a new Certificate of Authenticity (license) label is supplied with your new A15 CPU board, adhere it to
the outer cover in the location specified in Figure 7-1. on page 7-7.
3. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-25
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board
Figure 7-10
7-26
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
A15 CPU Board Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board
7-27
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard and the USB Hub
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard and the USB Hub
Tools Required
•
T-8 TORX driver (set to 5 in-lb)
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-11 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6. Position the analyzer bottom side
up.
3. Remove the A41 hard disk drive. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)” on
page 7-46.
4. If your analyzer is an Option 146 or Option 246, the A29 reference switch (with its mounting bracket), DC
block, and limiter must be removed and reinstalled on the new A16 test set motherboard. Refer to
“Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block” on page 7-44.
5. Remove the hard disk drive shield (item ①) by loosening two attachment screws (item ➁), using a T-10
TORX driver. These screws are accessible through holes in the side of the chassis.
6. Disconnect the ribbon cables (item ③) from the A16 test set motherboard:
7. Disconnect the wrapped-wire and flexible RF cables (item ④) from the A16 test set motherboard:
8. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove nine screws (item ⑤) from the rear panel and four screws (item ⑥)
from the A16 test set motherboard.
9. Slide the A16 test set motherboard toward the front of the instrument to release the locking pins (item
⑦), then lift the motherboard and remove it from the analyzer.
10. To remove the USB hub, remove two screws (item ⑧), using a T-8 TORX driver.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-28
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-11
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A16 Test Set Motherboard and the USB Hub
A16 Test Set Motherboard Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-29
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-12 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the A12 multiplier board and the A13 fractional-N synthesizer board. Refer to “Removing and
Replacing the A12 Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
4. Remove the A17 QABC board:
a. Disconnect cables W64, W65, W67. It may be necessary to loosen each of these cables at the other
end to move them out of the way to remove the A17 QABC board.
b. Disconnect flexible cables W70, W71, W72, and W73.
c. Disconnect the A29 reference switch cable at A17J10.
d. While holding cables W64, W65, and W67 out of the way, remove the A17 QABC board from the
analyzer. Be careful not to damage cables W64, W65, and W67.
5. Remove the assemblies and cables from the A17 QABC board:
a. Remove the A18 MASSQuad from the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A18
MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)” on page 7-32.
b. Remove the A26 step attenuator from the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the
A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator” on page 7-42.
c. Remove cables W74 and W75 from the A17 QABC board.
d. Remove the retainer clips from cables W76 and W77 and remove cables W76 and W77 from the A17
QABC board.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure, installing the assemblies and cables removed from the old
A17 QABC board onto the new A17 QABC board. Be sure to reinstall the retainer clips on cables W76
and W77 in the locations indicated.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-30
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-12
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board
A17 QABC Board Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-31
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-13 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board” on page 7-30.
4. Remove the A18 MASSQuad from the A17 QABC board:
a. Disconnect cables W63, W74, W75, W77, W78, and W79 from the A18 MASSQuad.
b. Remove the three mounting screws (item ①) and remove the A18 MASSQuad from the A17 QABC
board.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. Before installing the new A18 MASSQuad, remove the two
50-ohm loads from the old A18 MASSQuad and install them on the new A18 MASSQuad.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-32
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-13
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A18 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad)
A18 MASSQuad Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-33
Repair and Replacement Procedures
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad
Mounting Block
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-14 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6. Position the analyzer bottom side
up.
3. With a 5/16 inch wrench, disconnect the semirigid cables (item ①) from the A19 MASSQuad.
4. Disconnect the flexible cables (item ➁), and the ribbon cable (item ③) from the A19 MASSQuad.
5. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the mounting screws (item ④) from the A19 MASSQuad.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cables. Some flexing of the cables
is necessary to remove the assembly. Do not over bend the semirigid cables.
6. Remove the A19 MASSQuad from the analyzer. Observe the CAUTION above.
7. The MASSQuad mounting block can now be removed by removing the attachment screws (item ⑤). It is
not necessary to remove the mounting block to replace the MASSQuad.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure. If your analyzer contains the second source option (Options
146/246), there will be two 50-ohm loads attached to unused ports on the old A19 MASSQuad. Remove
these loads and install them on the new A19 MASSQuad before installing it in the analyzer.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-34
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Repair and Replacement Procedures
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and MASSQuad Mounting Block
Figure 7-14
A19 MASSQuad Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-35
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-15 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6. Position the analyzer bottom side
up.
3. With a 5/16 inch wrench, disconnect the semirigid cables (item ①) from the A20 QuintBrick.
4. Disconnect the flexible cables (item ➁) and the ribbon cable (item ③) from the A20 QuintBrick.
5. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the mounting screws (item ④) from the A20 QuintBrick.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cables. Some flexing of the cables
is necessary to remove the assembly. Do not over bend them.
6. Remove the A20 QuintBrick from the analyzer. Observe the CAUTION above.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-36
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-15
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A20 Mixer Brick (QuintBrick)
A20 QuintBrick Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-37
Repair and Replacement Procedures
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and Coupler Mounting Blocks
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and
Coupler Mounting Blocks
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-15 TORX driver (set to 14 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
1 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 72 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-16 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6. Position the analyzer bottom side
up.
3. Identify the test port coupler to be removed.
4. With a 5/16 inch wrench, disconnect the semirigid cables (item ①) from the test port coupler.
5. With a T-15 TORX driver, remove the mounting screws (item ➁) from the test port coupler.
6. With a 1 inch wrench, remove the test port coupler dress nut (item ③) from the front panel. Be careful
not to scratch the front panel.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cables. Some flexing of the cables
is necessary to remove the assembly. Do not over bend them.
7. Remove the test port coupler from the analyzer. Observe the CAUTION above.
8. The test port coupler mounting block can now be removed by removing the attachment screws (item ④).
It is not necessary to remove the mounting block to replace the coupler.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-38
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
Repair and Replacement Procedures
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and Coupler Mounting Blocks
Figure 7-16
A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-39
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-17 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer cover. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6. Position the analyzer bottom side
up.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable (item ①) from the A25 step attenuator.
4. Using a 5/16-inch wrench, disconnect the semi-rigid cables (item ➁) from the A25 step attenuator.
5. With a T-10 TORX driver, loosen the mounting screws (item ③) in the analyzer side frame. It is not
necessary to completely remove the mounting screws.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the center pins of the semirigid cables. Some flexing of the cables
is necessary to remove the assembly. Do not over bend them.
6. Slide the attenuator upward to release the mounting screws and remove the A25 step attenuator from
the analyzer. Observe the CAUTION above.
Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the mounting screws from the old attenuator and insert them loosely into the new attenuator.
2. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
3. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-40
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-17
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
A25 60-dB Source Step Attenuator Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-41
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-18 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the A17 QABC board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A17 QABC Board” on page 7-30.
4. Remove the A26 step attenuator from the A17 QABC board:
a. Disconnect cables W76, W78, and W79 from the A26 step attenuator.
b. Remove the two mounting screws, located on the other side of the A17 QABC board, and remove the
A26 step attenuator from the A17 QABC board.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all cable connections and mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-42
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-18
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator
A26 60-dB Source Step Attenuator Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-43
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
1/4 inch open-end wrench
•
5/16 inch open-end wrench
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-19 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
3. Remove the A29 reference switch (and bracket if necessary):
a. Disconnect the A29 reference switch cable from the A17 QABC board at A17J10. This connector can
be accessed from the right side of the analyzer. Refer to Figure 7-12 on page 7-31 for location of this
cable connector.
b. Disconnect cables W66, W67, and W68.
c. Remove two screws (item ①) and remove the A29 reference switch.
d. To remove the A29 reference switch bracket, remove three screws (item ➁).
4. Remove the DC block and limiter:
a. Disconnect cable W69 from the DC block.
a. While holding the hex nut on cable W68 with a 1/4-in wrench, use a 5/16-in wrench to disconnect
this cable from the limiter.
b. Cut the cable tie used to secure the limiter and remove the DC block and limiter from the analyzer.
c. Using a 5/16-in wrench to hold the hex nut on the limiter, use another 5/16-in wrench to loosen the
DC block connector and remove the DC block from the limiter.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure using the tools specified. Be sure to install a new cable tie to
secure the limiter.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-44
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-19
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block
A29 Reference Switch, Limiter, and DC Block Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-45
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Certain unique files exist on the hard disk drive that are necessary for proper operation of your analyzer.
These files must be copied to another location to allow them to be installed onto the new HDD after it has
been installed.
If you are replacing the HDD, not just removing the hard disk drive assembly (HDDA) to allow access to other
assemblies, the following procedure must be performed first.
If you are not replacing the actual HDD, proceed to “Tools Required,” on this page.
Copy Unique Files from the Hard Disk
1. Insert a USB flash memory drive into a USB port.
2. Open Windows Explorer.
3. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer.
4. Copy each of the following files from the hard disk drive to the USB drive:
•
gen.lic
•
user_calkitfile
•
All files prefixed with mxcalfile_.
•
Any personal user files that you wish to preserve.
5. Remove the USB drive from the USB port.
6. Exit Windows Explorer.
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 7 in-lb; for hard disk drive replacement)
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb; for all other T-10 applications)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the analyzer power cord.
Refer to Figure 7-20 for the remainder of this procedure.
2. With a T-10 TORX driver, loosen the four HDDA mounting screws (item ①) on the rear panel.
3. Remove the HDDA from the analyzer by pulling on the finger grip (item ➁). The HDDA interconnects
with a connector inside the analyzer rear panel so moderate force may be necessary to disengage this
connector.
7-46
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-20
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Hard Disk Drive Assembly Removal
Disassembling the HDDA
NOTE
If the HDD is being replaced by the HDDA (N8980A or N8981A), it is not necessary to
perform these steps.
Refer to Figure 7-21.
1. Remove the HDDA from the analyzer. Refer to “Removal Procedure” on page 7-46.
2. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the following items that mount the HDD (item ④), to the bracket:
a. The four screws (item ①).
b. If the HDD is equipped with the serial ATA interface:
•
the four bushings (item ➁)
•
the nylon spacer (item ⑤)
c. If the HDD is equipped with the parallel ATA interface:
•
the eight bushings (item ➁)
3. Disconnect the HDD (item ④) from the interface board (item ③).
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-47
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Figure 7-21
7-48
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Hard Disk Drive Assembly with Parallel ATA Interface (Exploded View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-22
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Hard Disk Drive Assembly with Serial ATA Interface (Exploded View)
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-49
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Reassembly Procedure
NOTE
If the HDD is being replaced by the HDDA (N8980A or N8981A), it is not necessary to
perform these steps.
If the HDD is equipped with a parallel ATA interface, follow the step below.
•
With the disk drive bracket right-side up (it is shown upside down in Figure 7-21 on page 7-48), insert
four bushings (item ➁) into the four holes in the bracket.
If the HDD is equipped with a serial ATA interface, follow the step below.
•
With the disk drive bracket right-side up (it is shown upside down in Figure 7-22 on page 7-49), place the
nylon spacer (item ⑤) on the bracket.
Regardless of which ATA interface the HDD is equipped with, follow the steps below.
1. Connect the new HDD (item ④) to the interface board (item ③) by pushing it firmly into the connector
on the interface board. Take special care to align the connector pins. Applying power to a misaligned
connection can permanently damage the HDD.
2. While holding the HDD in place, turn the bracket over and insert the other four bushings (item ➁), into
the other side of the same four holes specified in step 1.
3. Install the four screws (item ①), finger tight, through the four bushings (item ➁), to attach the HDD to
the bracket.
With a T-10 TORX driver, snug-tighten the four screws in a Z-pattern, and then torque them, in the
same pattern, to 7 in-lb.
Reinstalling the HDDA
1. Reinstall the HDDA into the analyzer:
a. Slide the HDDA into the slot in the rear panel and push it firmly into place to engage the connector.
Refer to Figure 7-20 on page 7-47.
b. With a T-10 TORX driver, tighten the four HDDA mounting screws (item ①).
7-50
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Initialize the Windows Operating System
1. Connect a mouse and keyboard to the analyzer.
2. Turn on power to the analyzer.
3. The operating system initialization process will run automatically. Part way through the process, you
will be prompted to accept the Windows licensing agreement. The entire process takes approximately
six minutes, during which the analyzer will reboot up to three times.
4. After the PNA application screen is displayed, there may be a display to remind you to upgrade the
firmware. If so, click OK to continue.
Set Up the Agilent Administrator Password
After an HDD replacement, it is necessary to set up the Agilent administrator password for the analyzer.
Go to the following Internet site, enter your PNA serial number, and get a six-digit numerical password:
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/hdd/index.html#agpswd.
The network analyzer must be powered up and operating for this procedure.
1. On the Windows Desktop, right-click on My Computer, and then click Manage.
2. In the Computer Management window, navigate to System Tools, Local Users and Groups, Users.
3. Right-click on Agilent, click on Set Password, and complete these steps in the window:
a. Type the password obtained from Agilent as the Password. Refer to “Set Up the Agilent
Administrator Password” on page 7-51 for information if you have not yet obtained this password.
b. Type the password again in the Confirm password block.
c. Click OK.
4. Right-click on Agilent, click on Properties, and complete these steps in the window:
a. Unselect User must change password at next logon (if not already unselected).
b. Unselect User cannot change password (if not already unselected).
c. Select Password never expires (if not already selected).
d. Click OK.
5. Close the Computer Management window.
Install Backup Files onto the New Hard Disk Drive
The files that were previously saved onto a USB memory drive must now be installed onto the new HDD. The
network analyzer must be powered up and operating.
1. Insert the USB memory drive into a USB port.
2. Click on START. (It may be necessary to exit the Network Analyzer application.)
3. Point to Programs, Accessories, and then open Windows Explorer.
4. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer.
5. Copy each of the backup files from the USB memory drive to the HDD.
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-51
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the A41 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
6. Navigate to D:\CalFiles\.
7. Copy the backup files prefixed with mxcalfile_ from the USB memory drive to the HDD.
8. After all files have been copied, remove the USB memory drive from the USB port.
9. Exit Windows Explorer.
Post-Repair Procedures
1. Adhere the new Certificate of Authenticity (license) label to the outer cover in the location specified in
Figure 7-1. on page 7-7.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-52
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan
Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
Pozidriv screw driver
•
5/16 inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the Front Panel Assembly” on page
7-8.
3. Remove the outer and inner covers. Refer to “Removing the Covers” on page 7-6.
4. Remove the A22 test port coupler. This is necessary to gain access to one of the midweb mounting
screws. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A21, A22, A23, and A24 Test Port Couplers and Coupler
Mounting Blocks” on page 7-38.
5. Remove the A19 MASSQuad and the MASS mounting block. This is necessary to gain access to one of
the midweb mounting screws. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A19 MASS 26.5 (MASSQuad) and
MASSQuad Mounting Block” on page 7-34.
6. Remove the A4 power supply assembly. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A4 Power Supply
Assembly” on page 7-14.
7. Remove the card cage boards (A5 through A10) and plenum bracket. Refer to “Removing and Replacing
the A5 through A10 Boards” on page 7-16.
8. Remove the second source boards (A11, A12, A13, and A17). Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A12
Multiplier and the A13 Fractional-N Synthesizer Boards” on page 7-20.
NOTE
This procedure has two parts: removing the midweb and removing the fan from the midweb.
You must remove the midweb before removing the fan.
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-53
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing the Midweb
Refer to Figure 7-23.
1. Disconnect the power cable (item ①) for each of the three fans from the A14 system motherboard.
2. With a T-10 TORX driver, remove the seven midweb mounting screws (item ➁). Three of the mounting
screws are located on the bottom of the chassis. The analyzer must be placed on its side to access these
three screws.
3. Lift out the midweb being careful not to damage any adjacent components.
Figure 7-23
7-54
Midweb Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Midweb and the B1 Fan
Removing the Fan
Refer to Figure 7-24.
1. To remove the fan, it is necessary to remove the four nylon rivets that attach it to the midweb. To do this,
use the Pozidriv screwdriver on the nylon screw (item ➀) and a small blade screwdriver to stabilize the
rivet. Turn and push the rivet out of the rivet hole. Once the four rivets are out, remove the fan.
Figure 7-24
B1 Fan Removal
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Use the tools specified for all mounting screws.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-55
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
Tools Required
•
T-10 TORX driver (set to 9 in-lb)
•
T-20 TORX driver (set to 21 in-lb)
•
ESD grounding wrist strap
Removal Procedure
Refer to Figure 7-25 for this procedure.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the A15 CPU board. Refer to “Removing and Replacing the A15 CPU Board” on page 7-24.
3. Lift the battery (item ①) just enough to free it from its holder and slide it from under the battery clip (item
➁). Be careful not to over bend the battery clip as it can be damaged or broken.
4. DO NOT THROW AWAY THE BATTERY. COLLECT IT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE. Refer to “Lithium
Battery Disposal” on page 1-9 for additional information on battery disposal.
Replacement Procedure
1. Reverse the order of the removal procedure following all instructions included with the new battery.
2. Perform the post-repair adjustments, verifications, and performance tests that pertain to this removal
procedure. Refer to Table 7-2 on page 7-58.
7-56
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 7-25
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Removing and Replacing the Lithium Battery
Lithium Battery Removal
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-57
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Post-Repair Procedures
After the replacement of an assembly, you must perform the service procedures in the order listed in Table
7-2.
Procedures referenced in this table are located in Chapter 3, “Tests and Adjustments,” unless specified
otherwise.
Table 7-2
Related Service Procedures
Replaced Assembly
Adjustments
and Other Procedures
Verification, Performance,
and Other Tests and Procedures
A1 keypad assembly
No adjustment needed
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test in
Chapter 4
A2 display assembly
No adjustment needed
A2 Display Test in Chapter 4
A3 front panel interface board
No adjustment needed
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test and A2
Display Test in Chapter 4
A4 power supply assembly
No adjustment needed
None needed
A5 SPAM board
No adjustment needed
A6 multiplier board
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
A8 or A12a multiplier board
EE Default Adjustment
Source Calibration Adjustment
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Frequency Accuracy Test
Source Power Accuracy Test
Source Maximum Power Output Test
Source Power Linearity Test
The Operator’s Check
EE Default Adjustment
Source Calibration Adjustment
A9 or A13a fractional-N synthesizer Receiver Calibration Adjustment
board
Frequency Accuracy Test
Source Power Accuracy Test
Source Maximum Power Output Test
Source Power Linearity Test
The Operator’s Check
Noise Floor Test
Trace Noise Test
10 MHz Frequency Reference
Adjustment
A10 frequency reference board
Restore option data (Refer to
Frequency Accuracy Test
“Repairing and Recovering
Option Data” in Chapter 8.)
A11 vertical motherboard
A14 system motherboard
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
No adjustment needed
Front Panel Keypad and RPG Test and A2
Display Test in Chapter 4
The Operator’s Check
A15 CPU board
7-58
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Table 7-2
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
Related Service Procedures (Continued)
Replaced Assembly
A16 test set motherboard
A17a QABC board
A19 or A18a MASS 26.5
(MASSQuad)
Adjustments
and Other Procedures
Reinstall the serial number. (Refer
to “Installing or Changing a Serial
Number” in Chapter 8.)
Re-enable all hardware options.
(Refer to “Enabling or Removing
Options” in Chapter 8.)
Verification, Performance,
and Other Tests and Procedures
The Operator’s Check
Source Calibration Adjustment
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Frequency Accuracy Test
Source Maximum Power Output Test
The Operator’s Check
Source Calibration Adjustment
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Frequency Accuracy Test
Source Power Accuracy Test
Source Maximum Power Output Test
Source Power Linearity Test
The Operator’s Check
Receiver Compression Test
A20 mixer brick (QuintBrick)
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Noise Floor Test
Calibration Coefficients Test
Dynamic Accuracy Test
A21, A22, A23 and A24 test port
couplers
Source Calibration Adjustment
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Source Maximum Power Output Test
A25 or A26a 60-dB source step
attenuator
Source Calibration Adjustment
Receiver Calibration Adjustment
Source Maximum Power Output Test
A29 reference switch
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
A41 hard disk drive
Restore previously saved receiver
calibration datab
(or perform Receiver Calibration
Adjustment)
Read and write to the drive
B1 fan
No adjustment needed
Check for fan operation
Limiter, DC block
No adjustment needed
The Operator’s Check
USB hub
No adjustment needed
Check for proper operation
Battery
No adjustment needed
None
Calibration Coefficients Test
Calibration Coefficients Test
a. When testing this assembly, the tests are performed on Port 3 for the second source path.
b. If a backup copy of receiver calibration data from the faulty disk drive is available, it can be copied to the
new disk drive. If not, new data must be generated by performing the “Receiver Calibration Adjustment.”
Service Guide N5230-90025
7-59
Repair and Replacement Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures
7-60
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Service Guide N5230-90025
8
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-1
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Information in This Chapter
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Information in This Chapter
Chapter Eight at-a-Glance
Section Title
Summary of Content
Start Page
Error Terms
How to use error terms as a preventive maintenance
and troubleshooting tool.
page 8-3
Option Enable Utility
How to use the option enable utility to:
page 8-14
•
enable options that have been added to your
analyzer,
•
repair lost or damaged option data,
•
install or change a serial number.
Firmware Upgrades
How to check your analyzer’s current firmware revision
and where to locate firmware upgrades.
page 8-18
Operating System Recovery
Where to find the information on recovering from a
damaged operating system.
page 8-19
Correction Constants
How to store correction constants after making
adjustments to your analyzer.
page 8-20
8-2
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Error Terms
Using Error Terms as a Diagnostic Tool
By examining error terms, you can monitor system performance for preventive maintenance and
troubleshooting purposes.
The magnitude and shape of the error terms are affected by:
•
calibration kit devices
•
cables
•
adapters and accessories
•
the assemblies from the signal separation group of the analyzer
Calibration kit devices, cables, and adapters and accessories are the most common cause of error term
anomalies. Make sure of the following:
•
Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specification.
•
Use proper connection technique during measurement and calibration. For information on connection
technique and on cleaning and gaging connectors, refer to “Review the Principles of Connector Care” on
page 3-5 or to the calibration kit’s user’s and service guide.
Preventive Maintenance
If you print or plot the error terms at set intervals (weekly, monthly and so forth), you can compare current
error terms to these records. A stable system should generate repeatable error terms over long intervals, (for
example, six months). Look for the following:
•
A long-term trend often reflects drift, connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation, indicating the
need for further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the system may still conform to
specifications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors and cables.
•
A sudden shift in error terms may indicate the need for troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting
You can use the error terms as a tool to isolate faulty assemblies in the signal separation group of your
analyzer. You can compare the current values to preventive maintenance records or to the typical values
listed in Table 8-1 on page 8-10.
To find assemblies related to error term failures, refer to error term descriptions in “Error Term Data” on
page 8-10. Each plot description lists common assemblies related to each error term. Identify the assembly
and refer to Chapter 4, “Troubleshooting”.
NOTE
Always suspect calibration devices, cables, or improper connector maintenance as the
primary cause of an error term anomaly.
Performing Measurement Calibration
A calibration must be performed to allow the analyzer to calculate the error terms before they can be used
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-3
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
as a tool:
CAUTION
Perform the following procedure only at a static-safe workstation, and wear a grounded
wrist strap.
This is important. If not properly protected against, electrostatic discharge can seriously
damage your analyzer, resulting in costly repair.
To reduce the chance of electrostatic discharge, follow all of the recommendations outlined
in “Electrostatic Discharge Protection” on page 1-6, when performing the following
calibration.
1. Connect a test cable to Port 2.
2. Perform a full 2-port calibration, FULL SOLT 2-Port. Refer to embedded help in the analyzer if necessary.
Using Flowgraphs to Identify Error Terms
Flowgraphs are a graphical representation of signal flow through the measurement path. The flowgraphs in
Figure 8-1, Figure 8-2, Figure 8-3, and Figure 8-4 illustrate the error terms associated with measurement
calibration for 1-port, 2-port, 3-port, and 4-port configurations respectively.
Figure 8-1
Flowgraph of One-Port Error Terms for Port 1
where:
E = Error term
Subscript:
D = Directivity
S = Source Match
R = Reflection Tracking
The error terms are the same for a one port measurement on Port 2 (S22).
8-4
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 8-2
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Flowgraph of Two-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
1st Subscript:
D = Directivity
S = Source Match
R = Reflection Tracking
X = Crosstalk (Isolation)
L = Load Match
T = Transmission Tracking
2nd Subscript:
F = forward measurement (Port 1 to Port 2)
R = reverse measurement (Port 2 to Port 1)
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-5
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Figure 8-3
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Flowgraph of Three-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
DIR = Directivity
MAT = Forward Source Match and Reverse Load Match
TRK = Forward Reflection Tracking and Reverse Transmission Tracking
For the case of a full 3-port calibration, port 1 has
three Match error terms:
S11 source match
S12 load match
S13 load match
and three Tracking error terms:
S11 reflection tracking
S12 transmission tracking
S13 transmission tracking
There are six isolation terms not shown.
8-6
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Figure 8-4
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Flowgraph of Four-Port Error Terms
where:
E = error term
DIR = Directivity
MAT = Forward Source Match and Reverse Load Match
TRK = Forward Reflection Tracking and Reverse Transmission Tracking
For the case of a full 4-port calibration, port 1 has
four Match error terms:
S11 source match
S12 load match
S13 load match
S14 load match
and four Tracking error terms:
S11 reflection tracking
S12 transmission tracking
S13 transmission tracking
S12 transmission tracking
There are eight isolation (crosstalk) terms not shown.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-7
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Accessing Error Terms
Error terms can be accessed either manually or programmatically:
Manually
•
“Front Panel Access to Error Terms” on page 8-8
Programmatically
•
“GPIB Access to Error Terms” on page 8-9
•
“COM/DCOM Access to Error Terms” on page 8-9
Manual Access to Error Terms
Front Panel Access to Error Terms
NOTE
Ensure the calibration correction is active by making sure that Correction on/OFF has a
check-mark in the Calibration menu.
To access the error terms from the front panel, perform the following steps:
1. In the System menu, point to Service, Utilities, and then click Cal Set Viewer.
The Cal Set Viewer toolbar appears directly above the trace window.
2. In the Cal Set list, select the desired cal set.
3. Click the Standards/ETerms button to toggle between viewing the raw measurement data from the
standard or the corrected error term data. Note that the title of the center box in the tool bar will toggle
between Standard and Error Term.
4. In the Standard or Error Term list, select the standard or error term to view. Click the View check box.
5. Compare the displayed measurement trace to the equivalent data trace plots that start in “Error Term
Data” on page 8-10, to previously measured data, or to the uncorrected performance specifications listed
in Table 8-1 on page 8-10.
6. Print numerical data or print a plot of the measurement results.
8-8
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Programmatic Access to Error Terms
GPIB Access to Error Terms
You can access error terms by way of GPIB with Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI).
For more information on GPIB and SCPI, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer. Type in keyword “errors,
systematic” in the index.
COM/DCOM Access to Error Terms
You can access error terms by way of Component Object Model (COM) or Distributed Component Object
Model (DCOM) software architecture.
For more information on COM and DCOM, refer to the embedded help in the analyzer. Type in keyword
“errors, systematic” in the index.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-9
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Error Term Data
The error term descriptions in this section include the following information:
•
a table of the error terms
•
description and significance of each error term
•
measurements affected by each error term
•
typical cause of failure for each error term
The same description applies to both the forward (F) and reverse (R) terms.
IMPORTANT
Data are listed here as a convenience only. Detailed instrument specifications are listed in
the embedded help in the network analyzer.
Table 8-1
Error Term Dataa
Frequency Range
300 kHz
to
10 MHzb
10 MHz
to
1 GHz
1 GHz
to
3 GHz
3 GHz
to
5 GHz
–23dB
–28dB
–25dB
–20dB
Source
Match
–8dB
–12dB
–12dB
–12dB
Load Match
–9dB
–20dB
–20dB
–18dB
Parameter
300 kHz
to
5 MHz
5 MHz
to
10 MHz
10 MHz
to
45 MHz
45 MHz
to
4 GHz
4 GHz
to
6 GHz
6 GHz
to
10.5 GHz
Crosstalkc
–70dB
–100dB
–110dB
–122dB
–123dB
–120dB
Parameter
Directivity
5 GHz
to
10.5 GHz
10.5 GHz
to
11.5 GHz
11.5 GHz
to
13.5 GHz
–17dB
–12dB
13.5 GHz
to
16 GHz
16 GHz
to
20 GHz
–15dB
–10dB
–12dB
–8dB
–7 dB
10.5 GHz
to
13.5 GHz
–7.5dB
13.5 GHz
to
15 GHz
–115dB
15 GHz
to
20 GHz
–110dB
a. The data in this table are uncorrected system performance. The values apply over an environmental temperature range
of 25 °C ±5 °C, with less than 1 °C deviation from the calibration temperature.
b. All values for 300 kHz to 10 MHz are typical.
c. All crosstalk values are typical. Measurement conditions: normalized to a thru, measured with two shorts, 10 Hz IF
bandwidth, averaging factor of 8, alternate mode, source power set to the lesser of the maximum power out or the
maximum receiver power.
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Expected
To verify that the system still conforms to specifications, perform a system verification. Refer to Chapter 3,
“Tests and Adjustments”.
8-10
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Directivity (EDF and EDR)
EDF and EDR are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the system. The directivity
error of the test port is determined by measuring the S11 and S22 reflection of the calibration kit load. The
load has a much better return loss specification than does the uncorrected test port. Therefore, any power
detected from this measurement is assumed to be from directivity error.
The measurements most affected by directivity errors are measurements of low reflection devices.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit load is the most common cause of directivity specification
failure.
If the load has been gaged and its performance independently verified, suspect the analyzer test port
coupler.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
Source Match (ESF and ESR)
ESF and ESR are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port. They are
obtained by measuring the reflection (S11, S22) of an open, and a short that are connected directly to the
ports. Source match is a measure of the match of the coupler, as well as the match between all components
from the source to the output port.
The measurements most affected by source match errors are reflection and transmission measurements of
highly reflective DUTs.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit open or short is the most common cause of source match
specification failure.
If the open or short performance has been independently verified, then suspect the analyzer switch splitter,
step attenuator, or coupler.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Signal Separation Group” on page 4-38.
Load Match (ELF and ELR)
Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the output of a 2-port
device. The match of test port cables is included in this response. Load match error terms are characterized
by measuring the S11 and S22 responses of a “thru” configuration during the calibration procedure.
The measurements most affected by load match errors are all transmission measurements, and reflection
measurements of a low insertion loss two-port device, such as an airline.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit load or a bad “thru” cable is the most common cause of load
match specification failure.
If the load and cable performance are independently verified, then suspect the analyzer test port coupler,
step attenuator, or the test receiver at the bad port.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42 or to “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-11
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR)
Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path (R1 or R2path)
and the frequency response of the reflection test path (A or B input path). These error terms are
characterized by measuring the reflection (S11, S22) of the open and the short during the measurement
calibration.
All reflection measurements are affected by the reflection tracking errors.
Typical Cause of Failure The calibration kit open or short is the most common cause of reflection tracking
specification failure.
If the open or short performance has been independently verified, suspect the following:
•
If both ERF and ERR fail
— suspect the analyzer switch splitter
•
If one of the track term specification fails
— suspect the coupler, step attenuator, or the test receiver of the failed port
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42 or to “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR)
Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path (including the
R input) and the frequency response of the transmission test path (including the A or B input) while
measuring transmission. The response of the test port cables is included. These terms are characterized by
measuring the transmission (S21, S12) of the “thru” configuration during the measurement calibration.
All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors.
Typical Cause of Failure The test port cable is the most common cause of transmission tracking
specification failure.
If the test port cable performance has been independently verified, suspect the following:
•
If both ETF and ETR fail
— suspect the analyzer switch splitter
•
If one of the track term specification fails
— suspect the coupler, step attenuator, or the test receiver of the failed port
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42 or to “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
8-12
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Error Terms
Isolation (EXF and EXR)
Isolation, or crosstalk, is the uncorrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent leakage
between the test ports and the signal paths. The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring
transmission (S21, S12) with loads attached to both ports during the measurement calibration.isolation
errors affect transmission measurements primarily where the measured signal level is very low.
The measurements most affected by isolation error terms are DUTs with large insertion loss. Since these
terms are low in magnitude, they are usually noisy (not very repeatable).
Typical Cause of Failure A loose cable connection or leakage between components in the test set are the
most likely cause of isolation problems.
After verifying the cable and its connections, suspect the analyzer switch splitter, step attenuator, coupler,
or receivers, and associated cabling.
To troubleshoot, refer to “Checking the Receiver Group” on page 4-42 or to “Checking the Signal Separation
Group” on page 4-38.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-13
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Option Enable Utility
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Option Enable Utility
Accessing the Option Enable Utility
To start the option enable utility:
•
On the System menu, point to Service, and then click Option Enable.
•
The dialog box illustrated in Figure 8-5 is displayed.
Figure 8-5
Option Enable Dialog Box
Option Entitlement Certificate
If you have received an “Option Entitlement Certificate”, follow the instructions on the certificate, under
“HOW TO USE THIS CERTIFICATE:”, to obtain license key(s) for the option(s) listed on the certificate. See
the important note below.
NOTE
When upgrading from one model number to another, a new option entitlement certificate
will be issued. When this certificate is redeemed for a license key, the automated system
will ask for the instrument's Host ID. Be sure to use the new Host ID that is associated with
the new model number. Using the current Host ID will cause a license to be generated that
will not work with the instrument. To determine the new Host ID, use the utility at the below
listed web site with the new model number.
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/upgrades.html
8-14
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Option Enable Utility
Enabling or Removing Options
There are two types of options:
•
Hardware:
Hardware options involve adding additional hardware to the analyzer. After the proper
hardware has been installed in the analyzer, the option can be enabled using the option
enable utility.
It is necessary to re-enable all hardware options if the test set motherboard is replaced.
•
Software:
Software options add features or functionality to the analyzer without the need for
additional hardware. These options are enabled using a special keyword. They are
enabled using the option enable utility.
It is necessary to backup all installed software options if the frequency reference board is
replaced.
NOTE
Some applications require a license key that is provided by Agilent. If you do not have the
required license key, contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on
page 2-11.
To enable or remove an option:
1. Start the option enable utility. Refer to “Accessing the Option Enable Utility” on page 8-14.
2. Click the arrow in the Select Desired Option box. A list of available options, similar to the list below, will
appear.
010 - Time Domain
UNL - Bias Tees w/Atten
014 - Configurable Test Set
016 - Receiver Attenuators
080 - Frequency Offset Mode
081 - Reference Transfer Switch
083 - Mixer Measurement Appl
??? - Enter Unlisted Option
3. Click on the option that you wish to either enable or remove, and then click Enable or Remove, whichever
is appropriate.
4. If the desired option is not available in the list, select Enter Unlisted Option. A dialog box appears that will
allow you to enter the option number. Enter the option number and follow the instructions on the display.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-15
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Option Enable Utility
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Repairing and Recovering Option Data
License, option, and model number data are stored in an EEPROM on the frequency reference board and
written into the gen.lic file on the hard disk drive. If the data stored in either of these items is lost, it can be
recovered from the other item.
NOTE
If the data on both the hard disk drive and the frequency reference board is lost, it can not be
recovered. Contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Recovery of Data After Repair
•
If the frequency reference board is replaced, use the Repair selection to recover data that has been lost
as a result of the repair:
1. Select Repair from the Option Enable menu bar (see Figure 8-5 on page 8-14).
2. Click the Freq Ref board has been replaced check box.
3. Click Begin Repair. The data is written from the gen.lic file into the EEPROM.
•
If the hard disk drive is replaced, a new gen.lic file is automatically created when the Network Analyzer
application starts, by retrieving the data from the EEPROM.
Recovery of Data if Option or Model Numbers are Incorrect
If the analyzer option or model numbers are not listed correctly on the analyzer display, in either the Option
Enable Dialog Box or the About Network Analyzer display, you should regenerate the options license file,
gen.lic:
1. Exit the Network Analyzer application.
2. Remove (or rename) the existing gen.lic file:
a. Open Windows Explorer and navigate to C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer.
b. Delete (or rename) gen.lic.
3. Exit the Windows Explorer application.
4. Open the Network Analyzer application. The application will generate a new gen.lic file when it starts.
5. Check the option listing:
a. On the System menu, point to Service, and then click Option Enable, or
b. On the Help menu, click About Network Analyzer.
NOTE
8-16
If the options are still not listed correctly, contact Agilent for assistance. Refer to
“Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Option Enable Utility
Installing or Changing a Serial Number
It is necessary to reinstall the instrument serial number if the test set motherboard is replaced.
IMPORTANT
Use extreme care when entering the serial number, as only one attempt is allowed.
1. To change a serial number, select Change Serial from the Option Enable menu bar (see Figure 8-5 on
page 8-14). The current serial number is displayed. If no serial number has previously been entered, the
word “NONE” will be displayed.
2. VERY CAREFULLY, type the new serial number into the space provided and then click Change.
3. If an error is made in entering the serial number, obtain a clear code from Agilent, enter the clear code in
the space provided, and then click Clear. The correct serial number can then be entered.
NOTE
To change an incorrect serial number, a clear-code password is required. Contact Agilent to
obtain the clear-code. Refer to “Contacting Agilent” on page 2-11.
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-17
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Firmware Upgrades
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Firmware Upgrades
How to Check the Current Firmware Version
1. With the Network Analyzer application running, click Help, About Network Analyzer.
A dialog box showing the current installed Application Code Version is displayed.
2. To determine if a firmware update is available, proceed to “Downloading from the Internet.”
Downloading from the Internet
If your network analyzer is connected to the Internet, there are two methods available for checking the
availability of, and downloading, new firmware:
•
Download directly from: http://www.agilent.com/find/pna. (Select your analyzer’s model number in this
website to view available upgrades.)
•
On the System menu, point to Service, and then click AgileUpdate. AgileUpdate compares the firmware
revision currently installed in your network analyzer to the latest version available and assists you in
downloading and installing the most recent version.
8-18
Service Guide N5230-90025
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Operating System Recovery
Operating System Recovery
Recovering from Hard Disk Drive Problems
If you suspect that you have a hard disk drive problem, go to the “Hard Drive Recovery” link on the Agilent
PNA Series: Service & Support Home Page on the Internet.
The URL for the Agilent PNA Series: Service & Support Home Page is:
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/
The URL for the Hard Drive Recovery page is:
http://na.tm.agilent.com/pna/hdrecovery.html
Service Guide N5230-90025
8-19
General Purpose Maintenance Procedures
Correction Constants
PNA Series Microwave Network Analyzers
N5230C
Correction Constants
The analyzer stores many correction constants in non-volatile EEPROM memory. These constants enable
the analyzer to produce accurate, leveled source signals and receive clean test signals.
Storing Correction Constants
After performing any adjustment listed on page 3-35 in this manual, store the correction constants to a
backup file on the analyzer hard disk drive by performing these steps:
•
Navigate to the EEPROM Backup Utility, located at:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\Network Analyzer\Service\eebackup.exe
•
Run the program.
•
Click Backup EEPROM.
•
Click Exit when the program has finished.
8-20
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
Numerics
010, time domain option, 2-4
014, configurable test set option, 2-4
080, frequency offset mode option, 2-4
1284-C port
rear panel connector, 5-29
troubleshooting, 4-18
13.5 GHz frequency range, Option F13, 2-5
1CP, rack mount with handles option, 2-4
1E1, source attenuator option, 2-5
20 GHz frequency range, Option F20, 2-5
50-ohm load
illustration, 6-21, 6-31
part number, 6-20, 6-30
60-dB source step attenuator
illustration, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-40
60-dB source step attenuator, second
source
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-42
897, option
built-in tests for commercial
calibration, 2-5
898, option
built-in tests for standards compliant
calibration, 2-5
A
A channel
troubleshooting, 4-25
typical power output, 4-37
A trace
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
A, B, and R1 traces
troubleshooting, 4-28
A1 keypad assembly
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
troubleshooting, 4-12
A10 frequency reference board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-10
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting, 4-30
A11 vertical motherboard
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-18
A12 multiplier board
Service Guide N5230-90025
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-20
troubleshooting
all bands, 4-36
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-20
troubleshooting
band 4, 4-35
bands 0-3, 4-34
bands 5-17, 4-36
A14 system motherboard
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-27, 5-30
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-22
troubleshooting, 4-9, 4-11
voltage checks, 4-8
A15 CPU board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-28
part numbers, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-24
troubleshooting, 4-9, 4-17
A16 test set motherboard
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-11
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-28
A17 QABC board
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-15
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-30
A18 MASS 26.5
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9, 5-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-32
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-40
A19 MASS 26.5
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-9, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-34
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39
A2 display assembly
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-11
troubleshooting, 4-12
A20 mixer brick
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-22
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-36
troubleshooting, 4-41
A21 test port 1 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
A22 test port 2 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
A23 test port 3 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
A24 test port 4 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
A25 source step attenuator
illustration, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-40
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39
A26 source step attenuator
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-42
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-40
A29 reference switch
illustration, 6-31
operation, 5-22
part number, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-44
troubleshooting, 4-42
A3 front panel interface board
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
troubleshooting, 4-12
A4 power supply assembly
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
Index-1
Index
operation, 5-30
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-14
troubleshooting, 4-7
A41 hard disk drive
location of
illustration, 6-43
operation, 5-29
part numbers, 6-44
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-47
procedure, 7-46
A41 hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
illustrated, 6-45
A41 hard disk drive (serial ATA)
illustrated, 6-47
part numbers, 6-46
A5 SPAM board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation
analog, 5-22
digital, 5-28
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting, 4-41
A6 multiplier board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
all bands, 4-33
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
band 4, 4-31
bands 0-3, 4-30
bands 5-17, 4-32
A8 multiplier board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
all bands, 4-34
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
band 4, 4-33
bands 0-3, 4-33
bands 5-17, 4-34
accessories
Index-2
analyzer, 2-6
in operator’s check, 3-10
in test port cable checks, 3-12
USB
part numbers, 6-49
accuracy
dynamic accuracy test, 3-34
frequency test, 3-30
adapters
required for servicing, 2-8
adding
options, 8-15
adjustments
frequency
at 10 MHz, 3-35
LO power, 3-36
receiver calibration, 3-38
source calibration, 3-37
system, 3-1, 3-35
getting ready, 3-4
administrator password
Agilent, 7-51
Agilent
administrator password, 7-51
contacting, 2-11
support, 2-10
all traces
troubleshooting, 4-28
analyzer
accessories, 2-6
block diagram
digital control group, 5-26
digital processor group, 5-26
receiver group, 5-23, 5-24
signal separation group, active,
5-19, 5-20
signal separation group, passive,
5-16
source group, 5-7
covers
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
removal and replacement, 7-6
external replaceable parts
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
feet
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
frequency range and max ouput
power, 5-4
frequency reference board assembly,
5-10
front panel interconnects, 5-27
functional groups, 5-3
digital control, 5-5
digital processing, 5-5
power supply, 5-5
receiver group, 5-5
signal separation, 5-5
synthesized source, 5-4
internal replaceable parts
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
miscellaneous replaceable parts
part numbers, 6-48
mounting in equipment rack, 2-4
operation
configurable test set, Option 014,
5-18
CPU board, 5-28
data acquisition subgroup, 5-28
digital control group, 5-25
digital processor group, 5-25
display assembly, 5-27
fractional-N synthesizer boards, 5-9
front panel interface board, 5-27
front panel subgroup, 5-27
hard disk drive, 5-29
keypad assembly, 5-27
main RAM, 5-28
MASS 26.5, 5-9, 5-17
mixer brick, 5-22
multiplier boards, 5-9
processing subgroup, 5-28
receiver group, 5-22
reference channel switch, 5-22
signal separation group, 5-16
source group, 5-6
source step attenuator, 5-17
SPAM board–analog, 5-22
SPAM board–digital, 5-28
test port couplers, 5-17
test set motherboard, 5-11
USB hub, 5-29
options, 2-3
understanding numbers, 2-3
QABC board, 5-15
rear panel
interconnects, 5-10, 5-11, 5-28
rear panel replaceable parts
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
strap handle
illustration, 6-41
part number, 6-40
system block diagram, 5-3
system operation
theory of, 5-3
upgrades, 2-6
warmup time, 3-4
ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994
verification, 3-8
ANSI/NCSL Z540–1–1994
non-type verification, 3-9
assemblies
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
location of part numbers, 6-7
rebuilt-exchange
procedure, 6-5
rebuilt-exchange program, 6-5
replacement
cautions about, 7-4
list of procedures, 7-4
sequence, 6-4, 7-4
warnings about, 7-4
attenuator
source
operation, 5-17
attenuator bracket
illustration, 6-37
part number, 6-36
attenuators
required for servicing, 2-8
AUX I/O connector
pin assignments, 5-14
rear panel, 5-11
B
B channel
troubleshooting, 4-25
typical power output, 4-37
B trace
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
B1 fan
removal and replacement, 7-53
band modes
troubleshooting
all bands, 4-33, 4-34, 4-36
band 4, 4-31, 4-33, 4-35
bands 0-3, 4-30, 4-33, 4-34
bands 5-17, 4-32, 4-34, 4-36
battery
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-57
procedure, 7-56
battery disposal, 1-9
before applying power, 1-3
block diagram
configurable test set, Option 014,
5-19, 5-20
digital control group, 5-26
digital processor group, 5-26
receiver group, 5-23, 5-24
signal separation group, active, 5-19,
5-20
signal separation group, passive, 5-16
source group, 5-7
bottom assembly, all options
hardware
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
bottom assembly, Option 140/240
replaceable cables
illustration, 6-25
Service Guide N5230-90025
part numbers, 6-24
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-23
part numbers, 6-22
bottom assembly, Option 145/245
replaceable cables
illustration, 6-29
part numbers, 6-28
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-27
part numbers, 6-26
bottom assembly, Option 146/246
replaceable cables
illustration, 6-33
part numbers, 6-32
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-31
part numbers, 6-30
bracket
attenuator
illustration, 6-37
part number, 6-36
broadband failure, 4-29
built-in tests
for commercial calibration, Option 897,
2-5
for standards compliant calibration,
Option 898, 2-5
C
C channel
troubleshooting, 4-25
typical power output, 4-37
C trace
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
C, D, and R3 traces
troubleshooting, 4-28
cable
substitution, 3-23
test port
checks, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15,
3-17
connector repeatability failure, 3-18
insertion loss failure, 3-14
magnitude and phase stability
failure, 3-16
return loss failure, 3-13
cables
GPIB
part numbers, 6-48
in bottom assembly, Option 140/240
illustration, 6-25
part numbers, 6-24
in bottom assembly, Option 145/245
illustration, 6-29
part numbers, 6-28
in bottom assembly, Option 146/246
illustration, 6-33
part numbers, 6-32
in top assembly, all options except
146/246
illustration, 6-15
part numbers, 6-14
in top assembly, Options 146/246
illustration, 6-19, 6-21
part numbers, 6-18, 6-20
required for servicing, 2-8
calibration
certificate of, 3-7
coefficients test, 3-33
commercial, built-in tests, Option 897,
2-5
kits, 2-8, 3-6
substitution, 3-23
measurement, 8-3
receiver, 3-38
source, 3-37
standards compliant, built-in tests,
Option 898, 2-5
care of connectors, 3-5
caution, 1-3
CE mark, 1-8
certificate of calibration, 3-7
changing
a serial number, 8-17
channel A
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-37
typical power output, 4-37
channel B
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-37
typical power output, 4-37
channel C
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-37
typical power output, 4-37
channel D
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-37
typical power output, 4-37
channel R
troubleshooting, 4-25
checks
cable
connector repeatability, failure of,
3-18
insertion loss, failure of, 3-14
magnitude and phase stability,
failure of, 3-16
return loss, failure of, 3-13
test port cables, 3-10, 3-12
operator’s, 3-10
accessories used in, 3-10
dialog box, 3-11
failure of, 3-11
performing, 3-10
Port 1, 3-10
Port 2, 3-10
preliminary, 3-10
Index-3
Index
system, 3-1
getting ready, 3-4
test port cable
accessories used in, 3-12
connector repeatability, 3-17
insertion loss, 3-14
magnitude and phase stability, 3-15
performing, 3-12
return loss, 3-13
COM, 8-9
commercial calibration
built-in tests, Option 897, 2-5
compression test, receiver, 3-31
configurable test set, Option 014
block diagram, 5-19, 5-20
description of, 2-4
operation, 5-18
configuration
high dynamic range
active measurement, 5-21
diagram, 5-21
normal
active measurement, 5-18
Option 014, 5-18
connector
care
principles of, 3-5
quick reference, 3-5
protective end caps
part numbers, 6-48
repeatability check
failure of, 3-18
of test port cables, 3-17
connector repeatability
check
test port cables, 3-17
connectors
care of, 3-5
front panel, 5-27
USB, 5-27
rear panel, 5-10, 5-11, 5-28
1284-C, 5-29
AUX I/O, 5-11, 5-14
Display, 5-29
EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-10
EXT 10 MHz REF OUT, 5-10
GPIB, 5-28
HANDLER I/O, 5-11, 5-13
PARALLEL, 5-29
RS-232, 5-28
SERIAL, 5-28
TEST SET I/O, 5-11, 5-12
TRIG IN, 5-11
TRIG OUT, 5-11
USB, 5-28
VGA, 5-29
constants
correction, 8-20
Index-4
contacting Agilent, 2-11
controller board, touch screen
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-10
controllers
troubleshooting with, 4-19
correction constants, 8-20
coupler
port 1
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
troubleshooting, 4-38
port 2
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
troubleshooting, 4-38
port 3
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
troubleshooting, 4-38
port 4
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
troubleshooting, 4-38
cover, removing, 1-4
covers, analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
removal and replacement, 7-6
CPU board
illustration, 6-13
operation, 5-28
part numbers, 6-12, 6-16, 6-17
removal and replacement, 7-24
troubleshooting, 4-17
cross-over cable, LAN, 4-21
CSA mark, 1-8
D
D channel
troubleshooting, 4-25
typical power output, 4-37
D trace
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
dangerous voltage, 1-4
data acquisition
operation, 5-28
data acquisition and processing
subgroup, 5-25
data storage
hard disk, 5-29
IDE, 5-29
data, option
recovering, 8-16
repairing, 8-16
DC block
illustration, 6-31
part number, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-44
DCOM, 8-9
description
functional
digital control group, 5-5
digital processing group, 5-5
power supply group, 5-5
receiver group, 5-5
signal separation group, 5-5
synthesized source group, 5-4
digital control group
block diagram, 5-26
functional description of, 5-5
operation, 5-25
digital processing and control
functional group, 5-3
digital processing group
block diagram, 5-26
functional description of, 5-5
operation, 5-25
directivity
cause of failure, 8-11
definition of, 8-11
measurements affected by, 8-11
disabling
options, 8-15
display assembly
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
parts list, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-11
troubleshooting, 4-12
display assembly, touch screen
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11, 7-13
procedure, 7-13
Display port
rear panel connector, 5-29
display test
running, 4-15
documentation
optional, 1-iii
part numbers, 6-48
standard, 1-iii
dynamic range, high
active measurement configuration,
5-21
E
earth ground, 1-3
electrostatic discharge, See ESD
EMI/RFI
supplies
part numbers, 6-49
enabling
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
options, 8-15
entitlement certificate, option, 8-14
environment, operating
specifications, 3-4
verification, 3-4
equipment rack
horizontal spacing, 2-4
mounting analyzer in, 2-4
equipment, service test
required, 2-7
error term data
description of, 8-10
error terms
access to, 8-8
via COM/DCOM commands, 8-9
via front panel, 8-8
via SCPI commands (using GPIB),
8-9
cause of failure to, 8-3
descriptions, 8-10
directivity, 8-11
flowgraph of one port, 8-4
flowgraph of two port, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7
identifying using flowgraphs, 8-4
isolation, 8-13
load match, 8-11
magnitude
affected by, 8-3
monitoring over time, 8-3
reflection tracking, 8-12
shape affected by, 8-3
source match, 8-11
transmission tracking, 8-12
typical data, 8-10
using as diagnostic tool, 8-3
using to aid troubleshooting, 8-3
worse than typical values, 8-10
ESD
protection, 1-6, 3-4, 4-3, 7-3, 8-4
supplies
part numbers, 6-49
exchange
module
procedure, 6-5
rebuilt assemblies
program, 6-5
EXT 10 MHz REF IN connector
rear panel, 5-10
EXT 10 MHz REF OUT connector
rear panel, 5-10
extended power range, Option 1E1, 2-5
extender board
measurement points, 4-8
voltages, 4-8
external analyzer
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
Service Guide N5230-90025
F
F13, 13.5 GHz frequency range option, 2-5
F20, 20 GHz frequency range option, 2-5
failure
broadband, 4-29
of connector repeatability check, 3-18
of insertion loss check, 3-14
of magnitude and phase stability
check, 3-16
of operator’s check, 3-11
of return loss check, 3-13
of system verification, 3-25
flowchart, 3-25
single vs. broadband, 4-29
fan
troubleshooting, 4-11
feet
analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
firmware upgrade
downloading from the internet, 8-18
flowgraph
of one port error terms, 8-4
of two port error terms, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7
using to identify error terms, 8-4
Fourier transform, 2-4
fractional-N synthesizer board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
band 4, 4-31, 4-33, 4-35
bands 0-3, 4-30, 4-33, 4-34
bands 5-17, 4-32, 4-34, 4-36
fractional-N synthesizer board, second
source
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-20
frequency accuracy
test, 3-30
frequency adjustment
at 10 MHz, 3-35
frequency offset mode, Option 080, 2-4
frequency range
and max output power, 5-4
frequency reference board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-10
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting, 4-30
front panel
connectors
USB, 5-27
interconnects, 5-27
knob
illustrated, 6-9
part number, 6-8
test, 4-15
troubleshooting, 4-12
LED board
illustration, 6-37
part number, 6-36
name plate
illustrated, 6-9
part number, 6-8
operation, 5-27
overlays
illustrated, 6-9
part numbers, 6-8
speaker, 5-27
subgroup, 5-25
troubleshooting, 4-12
USB
troubleshooting, 4-17
front panel assembly
removal and replacement, 7-8
replaceable parts
illustrated, 6-9, 6-11
part numbers, 6-8, 6-10
front panel interface board
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
troubleshooting, 4-12
front panel keypad assembly
troubleshooting, 4-12
front panel subassemblies
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedures, 7-10
functional groups, 5-3
fuses, 6-48
G
general safety considerations, 1-3
GPIB, 8-9
cables
part numbers, 6-48
port
rear panel connector, 5-28
running test software, 4-18
troubleshooting, 4-18
systems check, 4-18
ground, safety earth, 1-3
groups
functional, 5-3
Index-5
Index
H
handle
damaged, 1-3
kits
part numbers, 6-49
HANDLER I/O
connector
pin assignments, 5-13
rear panel, 5-11
handles
with rack mount, 2-4
hard disk drive
copying files from, 7-46
data storage, 5-29
installing backup files onto, 7-51
location of
illustration, 6-43
operation, 5-29
part number, 6-44
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-47
procedure, 7-46
replaceable parts
illustrated, 6-47
part numbers, 6-44
unique files located on, 7-46
hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
illustrated, 6-45
replaceable parts
illustrated, 6-45
hard disk drive (serial ATA)
illustrated, 6-47
part number, 6-46
replaceable parts
part numbers, 6-46
hardware
in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-45
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
part numbers, 6-46
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-47
in hard disk drive assembly
part numbers, 6-44
in internal analyzer
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
Index-6
part numbers, 6-42
in top assembly
illustration, 6-34, 6-35
part numbers, 6-34
location of part numbers, 6-7
options, 2-3, 8-15
high dynamic range
active measurement configuration,
5-21
configuration
diagram, 5-21
I
IDE
data storage, 5-29
illustration
hardware
in bottom assembly, 6-37
in external analyzer, 6-41
in internal analyzer, 6-39
in rear panel assembly, 6-43
in top assembly, all options, 6-34,
6-35
replaceable cables
in bottom assembly, Option
140/240, 6-25
in bottom assembly, Option
145/245, 6-29
in bottom assembly, Option
146/246, 6-33
in top assembly, all options except
146/246, 6-15
in top assembly, Options 146/246,
6-19, 6-21
replaceable parts
analyzer covers, 6-41
analyzer feet, 6-41
analyzer strap handle, 6-41
in bottom assembly, all options, 6-37
in bottom assembly, Option
140/240, 6-23
in bottom assembly, Option
145/245, 6-27
in bottom assembly, Option
146/246, 6-31
in external analyzer, 6-41
in internal analyzer, 6-39
in rear panel assembly, 6-43
in top assembly, all options, 6-34,
6-35
in top assembly, all options except
146/246, 6-13
in top assembly, Options 146/246,
6-16, 6-17
insertion loss
check
failure of, 3-14
test port cables, 3-14
installing
a serial number, 8-17
instruction documentation symbol, 1-8
instrument markings, 1-8
instrument specifications, 3-6
interconnects
AUX I/O
pin assignments, 5-14
front panel, 5-27
USB, 5-27
HANDLER I/O
pin assignments, 5-13
rear panel, 5-10, 5-11, 5-28
1284-C, 5-29
AUX I/O, 5-11
Display, 5-29
EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-10
EXT 10 MHz REF OUT, 5-10
GPIB, 5-28
HANDLER I/O, 5-11
LAN, 5-29
PARALLEL, 5-29
RS-232, 5-28
SERIAL, 5-28
TEST SET I/O, 5-11
TRIG IN, 5-11
TRIG OUT, 5-11
USB, 5-28
VGA, 5-29
TEST SET I/O
pin assignments, 5-12
internal analyzer
replaceable hardware
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
inverter board
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-10
IP address, LAN, 4-19
ISM1-A mark, 1-8
isolation
cause of failure, 8-13
definition of, 8-13
measurements affected by, 8-13
K
keypad assembly
illustrated, 6-11
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-10
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
procedure, 7-12
test, 4-14
troubleshooting, 4-12
kits
calibration, 2-8, 3-6
handle
part numbers, 6-49
rack mount
part numbers, 6-49
upgrade
part numbers, 6-49
verification, 2-8, 3-6
knob
front panel
illustrated, 6-9
part number, 6-8
test, 4-15
troubleshooting, 4-12
L
LAN
connector
rear panel, 5-29
cross-over cable, 4-21
IP address, 4-19
ping command, 4-19
ping to and from, 4-19
subnet mask, 4-19
testing between analyzers, 4-21
troubleshooting, 4-19
LED board, front panel
illustration, 6-37
part number, 6-36
limiter
illustration, 6-31
part number, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-44
linearity
source power
test, 3-29
test port output power
test, 3-29
lithium battery
removal and replacement, 7-56
illustrated, 7-57
lithium battery disposal, 1-9
LO power
adjustment, 3-36
load match
cause of failure, 8-11
definition of, 8-11
measurements affected by, 8-11, 8-12
load, 50-ohm
illustration, 6-21, 6-31
part number, 6-20, 6-30
locating
assembly part numbers, 6-7
hardware part numbers, 6-7
Service Guide N5230-90025
miscellaneous part numbers, 6-7
replaceable part numbers
by reference designator, 6-6
by type of part, 6-7
M
machine screws
in bottom assemblies
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in hard disk drive assembly
part numbers, 6-44
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
magnitude check
failure of, 3-16
test port cables, 3-15
maintenance
cleaning, 2-3
preventive
effect on error terms, 8-3
MASS 26.5
illustration, 6-16, 6-17, 6-23, 6-27,
6-31
operation, 5-9, 5-17
part number, 6-16, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-32, 7-34
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40
MASSQuad
illustration, 6-16, 6-17, 6-23, 6-27,
6-31
operation, 5-9, 5-17
part number, 6-16, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-32, 7-34
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40
max output power
and frequency range, 5-4
measurement
calibration, 8-3
traceability, 3-21
path, 3-21
uncertainty, 3-20
measurement configuration
active
high dynamic range, 5-21
normal, 5-18
measurement system
troubleshooting, 4-23
measuring
high-dynamic range devices, 2-4
high-power devices, 2-4
midweb
removal and replacement, 7-53
midweb fans
troubleshooting, 4-11
miscellaneous parts
location of part numbers, 6-7
required for servicing, 2-9
miscellaneous replaceable parts
part numbers, 6-48
mixer brick
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-22
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-36
troubleshooting, 4-41
module
exchange
procedure, 6-5
motherboard, system
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-22
troubleshooting, 4-11
motherboard, test set
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
multiplier board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-9
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting
all bands, 4-33, 4-34, 4-36
multiplier board, second source
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-20
N
N1966A pulse I/O adapter, 2-6
name plate
front panel
illustrated, 6-9
part number, 6-8
network analyzer, See analyzer
noise floor, test, 3-32
noise, trace noise test, 3-30
Non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994
verification, 3-9
O
OCXO (oven-controlled crystal oscillator)
frequency adjustment, 3-35
theory of operation, 5-10
operating environment
specifications, 3-4
verification, 3-4
operating system
Index-7
Index
recovery, 8-19
operation
configurable test set, Option 014, 5-18
CPU board, 5-28
data acquisition, 5-28
digital control, 5-25
digital processor, 5-25
display assembly, 5-27
fractional-N synthesizer boards, 5-9
frequency reference board, 5-10
front panel, 5-27
front panel interface board, 5-27
hard disk drive, 5-29
keypad assembly, 5-27
main RAM, 5-28
MASS 26.5, 5-9, 5-17
mixer brick, 5-22
multiplier boards, 5-9
power supply, 5-30
processing subgroup, 5-28
QABC board, 5-15
receiver group, 5-22
reference channel switch, 5-22
signal separation group, 5-16
source group, 5-6
SPAM board–analog, 5-22
SPAM board–digital, 5-28
step attenuator
source, 5-17
system motherboard, 5-27
test port couplers, 5-17
test set motherboard, 5-11
USB hub, 5-29
operator’s check, 3-10
accessories used in, 3-10
dialog box, 3-11
failure of, 3-11
performing, 3-10
Port 1, 3-10
Port 2, 3-10
option
analyzer, 2-3
understanding numbers, 2-3
data
recovering, 8-16
repairing, 8-16
enable utility
accessing, 8-14
dialog box, 8-14
enabling and removing, 8-15
entitlement certificate, 8-14
hardware, 8-15
service and support, 2-10
software, 8-15
Option 010, time domain, 2-4
Option 014, configurable test set, 2-4
block diagram, 5-19, 5-20
normal configuration, 5-18
Index-8
operation, 5-18
Option 080, frequency offset mode, 2-4
Option 140/240
description of, 2-3
replaceable cables, in bottom
assembly
illustration, 6-25
part numbers, 6-24
replaceable cables, in top assembly
illustration, 6-15
part numbers, 6-14
replaceable parts, in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-23
part numbers, 6-22
replaceable parts, in top assembly
illustration, 6-13
part numbers, 6-12
Option 145/245
description of, 2-3
replaceable cables, in bottom
assembly
illustration, 6-29
part numbers, 6-28
replaceable cables, in top assembly
illustration, 6-15
part numbers, 6-14
replaceable parts, in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-27
part numbers, 6-26
replaceable parts, in top assembly
illustration, 6-13
part numbers, 6-12
Option 146/246
description of, 2-3
replaceable cables, in bottom
assembly
illustration, 6-33
part numbers, 6-32
replaceable cables, in top assembly
illustration, 6-19, 6-21
part numbers, 6-18, 6-20
replaceable parts, in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-31
part numbers, 6-30
replaceable parts, in top assembly
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part numbers, 6-16
Option 1CM, rack mount without handles,
2-4
Option 1CM, rack mount without handles
option, 2-4
Option 1CP, rack mount with handles, 2-4
Option 1E1, source attenuator
description of, 2-5
operation, 5-17
Option 897
built-in tests for commercial
calibration, 2-5
Option 898
built-in tests for standard compliant
calibration, 2-5
Option F13, 13.5 GHz frequency range, 2-5
Option F20, 20 GHz frequency range, 2-5
Option S02, second source, 2-5
ordering information
options and upgrades, 2-3, 2-6
replaceable parts, 6-3
output power, source
accuracy test, 3-28
linearity, 3-29
maximum test, 3-29
output power, test port
accuracy test, 3-28
linearity, 3-29
maximum test, 3-29
overlays
front panel
illustrated, 6-9
part numbers, 6-8
P
pads
required for servicing, 2-8
paint
touch-up
part numbers, 6-49
PARALLEL
port
rear panel connector, 5-29
troubleshooting, 4-18
part numbers
accessories
USB, 6-49
cables
GPIB, 6-48
documentation, 6-48
hardware
in bottom assembly, 6-36
in external analyzer, 6-40
in hard disk drive, 6-44
in hard disk drive (serial ATA), 6-46
in internal analyzer, 6-38
in rear panel assembly, 6-42
in top assembly, all options, 6-34
kits
handle, 6-49
rack mount, 6-49
locating
by reference designator, 6-6
by type of part, 6-7
for assemblies, 6-7
for hardware, 6-7
for miscellaneous parts, 6-7
paint
touch-up, 6-49
protective end caps
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
for connectors, 6-48
replaceable cables
in bottom assembly, Option
140/240, 6-24
in bottom assembly, Option
145/245, 6-28
in bottom assembly, Option
146/246, 6-32
in top assembly, all options except
146/246, 6-14
in top assembly, Options 146/246,
6-18, 6-20
replaceable parts
analyzer covers, 6-40
analyzer feet, 6-40
analyzer strap handle, 6-40
in bottom assembly, all options, 6-36
in bottom assembly, Option
140/240, 6-22
in bottom assembly, Option
145/245, 6-26
in bottom assembly, Option
146/246, 6-30
in external analyzer, 6-40
in front panel assembly, 6-8, 6-10
in hard disk drive (serial ATA), 6-46
in hard disk drive assembly, 6-44
in internal analyzer, 6-38
in rear panel assembly, 6-42
in top assembly, all options, 6-34
in top assembly, all options except
146/246, 6-12
in top assembly, Options 146/246,
6-16
miscellaneous analyzer, 6-48
supplies
EMI/RFI, 6-49
ESD, 6-49
tools
service, 6-48
upgrade kits, 6-49
parts
in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in bottom assembly, Option 140/240
illustration, 6-23
part numbers, 6-22
in bottom assembly, Option 145/245
illustration, 6-27
part numbers, 6-26
in bottom assembly, Option 146/246
illustration, 6-31
part numbers, 6-30
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
Service Guide N5230-90025
in front panel assembly
illustrated, 6-9, 6-11
part numbers, 6-8, 6-10
in hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-45
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-47
in hard disk drive assembly
part numbers, 6-44
in hard disk drive assembly (serial
ATA)
part numbers, 6-46
in internal analyzer
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
in top assembly, all options
illustration, 6-34, 6-35
part numbers, 6-34
in top assembly, all options except
146/246
illustration, 6-13
part numbers, 6-12
in top assembly, Options 146/246
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part numbers, 6-16
locating
by reference designator, 6-6
by type of part, 6-7
miscellaneous
part numbers, 6-48
required for servicing, 2-9
replaceable
listing of, 6-6
ordering information, 6-3
parts, hardware
in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in external analyzer, all options
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in hard disk drive assembly, all options
part numbers, 6-44
in internal analyzer, all options
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
in rear panel assembly, all options
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
in top assembly, all options
illustration, 6-34, 6-35
part numbers, 6-34
password
Agilent administrator, 7-51
performance
tests, 3-28
calibration coefficients, 3-33
description of, 3-7
dynamic accuracy, 3-34
frequency accuracy, 3-30
noise floor, 3-32
receiver compression, 3-31
source maximum power output,
3-29
source power accuracy, 3-28
source power linearity, 3-29
test port output maximum power,
3-29
test port output power accuracy,
3-28
test port output power linearity, 3-29
trace noise, 3-30
verification
ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-8
non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-9
phase stability check
failure of, 3-16
test port cables, 3-15
pin assignments
connectors
AUX I/O, 5-14
HANDLER I/O, 5-13
TEST SET I/O, 5-12
ping
command, LAN, 4-19
from network, 4-20
to analyzer, 4-19
pixel
damaged, 4-15
definition, 4-15
plenum
removal and replacement, 7-18
plenum bracket
removal and replacement, 7-18
Port 1
check, 3-10
typical power output, 4-37
Port 2
check, 3-10
typical power output, 4-37
Port 3
typical power output, 4-37
Port 4
typical power output, 4-37
post-repair procedures, 7-58
power supply
check, 4-7
functional description of, 5-5
functional group, 5-3
if all voltages are missing, 4-9
operation, 5-30
Index-9
Index
voltage checks, 4-8
power supply assembly
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-14
troubleshooting, 4-7
power, source
accuracy test, 3-28
linearity test, 3-29
power, source output
maximum test, 3-29
power, test port output
accuracy test, 3-28
linearity test, 3-29
maximum test, 3-29
pre-repair
procedures
caution about, 7-3
warnings about, 7-3
preventive maintenance
effect on error terms, 8-3
processing subgroup
operation, 5-28
protection
against EMI/RFI, 6-49
against ESD, 1-6, 3-4, 4-3, 7-3, 8-4
protective end caps
for connectors
part numbers, 6-48
pulse I/O adapter, N1966A, 2-6
Q
QABC board
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
operation, 5-15
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-30
QuintBrick
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-22
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
Quintbrick
removal and replacement, 7-36
R
R channel
troubleshooting, 4-25
R trace
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
rack mount kits
part numbers, 6-49
with handles, Option 1CP, 2-4
without handles, Option 1CM, 2-4
RAM, main
operation, 5-28
rear panel
connectors
Index-10
1284-C, 5-29
AUX I/O, 5-11
Display, 5-29
EXT 10 MHz REF IN, 5-10
GPIB, 5-28
HANDLER I/O, 5-11
LAN, 5-29
PARALLEL, 5-29
RS-232, 5-28
SERIAL, 5-28
TEST SET I/O, 5-11
TRIG IN, 5-11
TRIG OUT, 5-11
USB, 5-28
VGA, 5-29
interconnects, 5-10, 5-11, 5-28
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
troubleshooting, 4-17
rebuilt-exchange assemblies
program, 6-5
receiver
accuracy
dynamic accuracy test, 3-34
calibration, 3-38
compression test, 3-31
dynamic accuracy test, 3-34
functional description of, 5-5
functional group, 5-3
linearity
dynamic accuracy test, 3-34
outputs
troubleshooting, 4-41
receiver display
running the test, 4-25
receiver group
block diagram, 5-23, 5-24
defined, 4-27
operation, 5-22
troubleshooting, 4-41
recovery
option data, 8-16
recovery, operating system, 8-19
reference channel switch
operation, 5-22
troubleshooting, 4-42
reference channel, See R channel
reference switch
illustration, 6-31
part number, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-44
reflection tracking
cause of failure, 8-12
definition of, 8-12
measurements affected by, 8-12
removal
A10 frequency reference board, 7-16
A11 vertical motherboard, 7-18
A12 multiplier board, 7-20
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-20
A14 system motherboard, 7-22
A15 CPU board, 7-24
A16 test set motherboard, 7-28
A17 QABC board, 7-30
A18 MASS 26.5, 7-32
A19 MASS 26.5, 7-34
A20 mixer brick, 7-36
A21 test port 1 coupler, 7-38
A22 test port 2 coupler, 7-38
A23 test port 3 coupler, 7-38
A24 test port 4 coupler, 7-38
A25 60-dB source step attenuator,
7-40
A26 60-dB source step attenuator,
7-42
A29 reference switch, 7-44
A4 power supply assembly, 7-14
A5 SPAM board, 7-16
A6 multiplier board, 7-16
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-16
A8 multiplier board, 7-16
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-16
DC block, 7-44
fan, 7-53
front panel assembly, 7-8
limiter, 7-44
midweb, 7-53
plenum, 7-18
plenum bracket, 7-18
removing
assemblies, See specific assembly.
options, 8-15
parts, See specific part.
removing the cover, 1-4
repair
post-repair procedures, 7-58
procedures
caution about, 7-3
warnings about, 7-3
repairing
option data, 8-16
replaceable cables
in bottom assembly, Option 140/240
illustration, 6-25
part numbers, 6-24
in bottom assembly, Option 145/245
illustration, 6-29
part numbers, 6-28
in bottom assembly, Option 146/246
illustration, 6-33
part numbers, 6-32
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
in top assembly, all options except
146/246
illustration, 6-15
part numbers, 6-14
in top assembly, Options 146/246
illustration, 6-19, 6-21
part numbers, 6-18, 6-20
replaceable hardware
in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-45
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
part numbers, 6-46
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-47
in hard disk drive assembly
part numbers, 6-44
in internal analyzer
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
replaceable parts
hardware, in bottom assembly
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in bottom assembly, Option 140/240
illustration, 6-23
part numbers, 6-22
in bottom assembly, Option 145/245
illustration, 6-27
part numbers, 6-26
in bottom assembly, Option 146/246
illustration, 6-31
part numbers, 6-30
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in front panel assembly
illustrated, 6-9, 6-11
part numbers, 6-8, 6-10
in hard disk drive (parallel ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-45
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
part numbers, 6-46
in hard disk drive (serial ATA)
assembly
illustrated, 6-47
in hard disk drive assembly
Service Guide N5230-90025
part numbers, 6-44
in internal analyzer
illustration, 6-39
part numbers, 6-38
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
in top assembly, all options
illustration, 6-34, 6-35
part numbers, 6-34
in top assembly, all options except
146/246
illustration, 6-13
part numbers, 6-12
in top assembly, Options 146/246
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part numbers, 6-16
listing of, 6-6
locating
by reference designator, 6-6
by type of part, 6-7
miscellaneous analyzer
part numbers, 6-48
ordering information, 6-3
replacement
A1 keypad assembly
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
A10 frequency reference board, 7-16
A11 vertical motherboard, 7-18
A12 multiplier board, 7-20
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-20
A14 system motherboard, 7-22
A15 CPU board, 7-24
A16 test set motherboard, 7-28
A17 QABC board, 7-30
A18 MASS 26.5, 7-32
A19 MASS 26.5, 7-34
A2 display assembly
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-11
A20 mixer brick, 7-36
A21 test port 1 coupler, 7-38
A22 test port 2 coupler, 7-38
A23 test port 3 coupler, 7-38
A24 test port 4 coupler, 7-38
A25 60-dB source step attenuator,
7-40
A26 60-dB source step attenuator,
7-42
A29 reference switch, 7-44
A3 front panel interface board
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
A4 power supply assembly, 7-14
A41 hard disk drive
illustrated, 7-47
procedure, 7-46
A5 SPAM board, 7-16
A6 multiplier board, 7-16
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-16
A8 multiplier board, 7-16
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board,
7-16
analyzer covers, 7-6
assembly
cautions about, 7-4
list of procedures, 7-4
sequence, 6-4, 7-4
warnings about, 7-4
DC block, 7-44
fan, 7-53
front panel assembly, 7-8
front panel subassemblies
illustrated, 7-11
procedures, 7-10
inverter board
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-10
limiter, 7-44
lithium battery
illustrated, 7-57
procedure, 7-56
midweb, 7-53
plenum, 7-18
plenum bracket, 7-18
touch screen controller board
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-10
touch screen display
illustrated, 7-13
touch screen display assembly
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-13
USB connector board
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
replacement sequence, 4-3
return loss check
failure of, 3-13
test port cables, 3-13
RFI/EMI
supplies
part numbers, 6-49
rotary pulse generator (RPG)
illustrated, 6-9
part number, 6-8
test, 4-15
troubleshooting, 4-12
RS-232 port
rear panel connector, 5-28
troubleshooting, 4-18
Index-11
Index
S
S02, second source option, 2-5
safety
considerations, 1-3
earth ground, 1-3
symbols, 1-3
SCPI, 8-9
screws
for bottom assemblies
illustration, 6-37
part numbers, 6-36
in external analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part numbers, 6-40
in hard disk drive assembly
part numbers, 6-44
in rear panel assembly
illustration, 6-43
part numbers, 6-42
second source, Option S02, 2-5
serial number
changing, 8-17
installing, 8-17
SERIAL port
rear panel connector, 5-28
troubleshooting, 4-18
service
contacting Agilent, 2-11
EMI/RFI parts
part numbers, 6-49
miscellaneous parts
required, 2-9
options, 2-10
procedures
caution about, 7-3
post-repair, 7-58
warnings about, 7-3
static safety parts
part numbers, 6-49
required, 2-9
test equipment
required, 2-7
tools
part numbers, 6-48
required, 2-9
warnings, 1-4
warranty
one-year return to Agilent, 2-10
standard, 2-10
shipment for service or repair, 2-11
signal separation
functional description of, 5-5
functional group, 5-3
signal separation group
defined, 4-27
operation, 5-16
troubleshooting, 4-37
signal separation group, active
Index-12
block diagram, 5-19, 5-20
signal separation group, passive
block diagram, 5-16
single band failure, 4-29
software
options, 8-15
source
calibration, 3-37
functional group, 5-3
maximum output power test, 3-29
power accuracy test, 3-28
power linearity test, 3-29
source attenuator
description of Option 1E1, 2-5
illustration, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-40
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40
source attenuator, second source
description of Option S02, 2-5
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-42
source group
block diagram, 5-7
defined, 4-27
operation, 5-6
troubleshooting, 4-29
source match
cause of failure, 8-11
definition of, 8-11
measurements affected by, 8-11
SPAM board
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
operation
analog, 5-22
digital, 5-28
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-16
troubleshooting, 4-41
speaker
front panel, 5-27
troubleshooting, 4-12
specifications
instrument, 3-6
stabilization, warm up time, 3-4
system, 3-6
stabilization
warm up time, 3-4
standards compliant calibration
built-in tests, Option 898, 2-5
static safety parts
required for servicing, 2-9
step attenuator, second source
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-42
step attenuator, source
illustration, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-40
troubleshooting, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40
storage data
IDE, 5-29
strap handle
analyzer
illustration, 6-41
part number, 6-40
subgroup
data acquisition and processing, 5-25
front panel, 5-25
subnet mask, LAN, 4-19
substitution
cable, 3-23
calibration kits, 3-23
verification kits, 3-23
supplies
EMI/RFI
part numbers, 6-49
ESD
part numbers, 6-49
support
contacting Agilent, 2-11
options, 2-10
organization, 2-10
switch, reference
illustration, 6-31
part number, 6-30
synthesized source
functional description of, 5-4
synthesized source group
operation, 5-6
system
adjustments, 3-1, 3-35
frequency at 10 MHz, 3-35
getting ready, 3-4
LO power, 3-36
receiver calibration, 3-38
source calibration, 3-37
checks, 3-1
getting ready, 3-4
operating
recovery, 8-19
specifications, 3-6
verification, 3-1, 3-6, 3-19
dialog box, 3-23
example of results, 3-26, 3-27
failure flowchart, 3-25
failure of, 3-25
getting ready, 3-4
interpreting results, 3-26
performing, 3-22
procedure, 3-23
what it verifies, 3-19
system motherboard
illustration, 6-13, 6-16, 6-17
Service Guide N5230-90025
Index
operation, 5-27
part number, 6-12, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-22
troubleshooting, 4-11
T
termination, 50-ohm
illustration, 6-21, 6-31
part number, 6-20, 6-30
test
calibration coefficients, 3-33
dynamic accuracy, 3-34
frequency accuracy, 3-30
noise floor, 3-32
performance
frequency accuracy, 3-30
source maximum power output,
3-29
source power accuracy, 3-28
test port maximum power output,
3-29
test port power accuracy, 3-28
receiver compression, 3-31
source power linearity, 3-29
test port output power linearity, 3-29
trace noise, 3-30
test equipment
required for service, 2-7
required for servicing, 2-7
test port
cable checks
connector repeatability failure, 3-18
dynamic accuracy test, 3-34
maximum output power test, 3-29
noise floor test, 3-32
output power accuracy test, 3-28
output power linearity test, 3-29
test port 1 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
test port 2 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
test port 3 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
test port 4 coupler
illustration, 6-23, 6-27, 6-31
Service Guide N5230-90025
operation, 5-17
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-38
troubleshooting, 4-38
test port cable
checks, 3-10
accessories used in, 3-12
connector repeatability, 3-17
insertion loss, 3-14
insertion loss failure, 3-14
magnitude and phase stability, 3-15
magnitude and phase stability
failure, 3-16
performing, 3-12
return loss, 3-13
return loss failure, 3-13
TEST SET I/O
connector
pin assignments, 5-12
rear panel, 5-11
test set motherboard
illustration, 6-23, 6-31
operation, 5-11
part number, 6-22, 6-26, 6-27, 6-30
removal and replacement, 7-28
tests
adjustments, 3-35
performance, 3-7, 3-28
source group, 4-29
time domain, Option 010
description of, 2-4
tools
required for servicing, 2-9
service, part numbers, 6-48
top assembly, all options
hardware
illustration, 6-34, 6-35
part numbers, 6-34
top assembly, all options except 146/246
replaceable cables
illustration, 6-15
part numbers, 6-14
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-13
part numbers, 6-12
top assembly, Options 146/246
replaceable cables
illustration, 6-19, 6-21
part numbers, 6-18, 6-20
replaceable parts
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part numbers, 6-16
touch screen controller board
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-10
touch screen display
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-13
touch screen display assembly
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-13
touch-up
paint
part numbers, 6-49
trace
troubleshooting
all traces, 4-28
troubleshooting all, 4-25
trace A
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
trace B
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
trace C
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
trace D
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
trace noise
test, 3-30
trace R
troubleshooting, 4-25, 4-28
trace, all
troubleshooting, 4-28
traceability
measurement, 3-21
path, 3-21
traces A, B, and R1
troubleshooting, 4-28
traces C, D, and R 3
troubleshooting, 4-28
transmission tracking
cause of failure, 8-12
definition of, 8-12
TRIG IN connector
rear panel, 5-11
TRIG OUT connector
rear panel, 5-11
troubleshooting
1284-C port, 4-18
A10 frequency reference board, 4-30
A12 multiplier board
all bands, 4-36
A13 fractional-N synthesizer board
band 4, 4-35
bands 0-3, 4-34
bands 5-17, 4-36
A14 motherboard, 4-11
A15 CPU board, 4-17
A18 MASSQuad, 4-38, 4-40
A19 MASSQuad, 4-38, 4-39
A2 display assembly, 4-12
A20 mixer brick, 4-41
A21 test port 1 coupler, 4-38
A22 test port 2 coupler, 4-38
A23 test port 3 coupler, 4-38
A24 test port 4 coupler, 4-38
Index-13
Index
A25 source step attenuator, 4-39
A26 source step attenuator, 4-40
A29 reference channel switch, 4-42
A3 front panel interface board, 4-12
A4 power supply assembly, 4-7
A5 SPAM board, 4-41
A6 multiplier board
all bands, 4-33
A7 fractional-N synthesizer board
band 4, 4-31
bands 0-3, 4-30
bands 5-17, 4-32
A8 multiplier board
all bands, 4-34
A9 fractional-N synthesizer board
band 4, 4-33
bands 0-3, 4-33
bands 5-17, 4-34
all bands, 4-34, 4-36
all traces, 4-28
band 4, 4-31, 4-33, 4-35
bands 0-3, 4-30, 4-33, 4-34
bands 5-17, 4-32, 4-34, 4-36
channel A, 4-25, 4-37
channel B, 4-25, 4-37
channel C, 4-25, 4-37
channel D, 4-25, 4-37
channel R, 4-25
check the basics, 4-4
error term failure
suspect devices, 8-3
fans, 4-11
front panel, 4-12
front panel keypad, 4-12
front panel knob, 4-12
front-panel USB, 4-12
GPIB port, 4-18
LAN, 4-19
measurement system, 4-23
receiver group, 4-41
running the receiver display, 4-25
signal separation group, 4-37
source group, 4-29
traces A, B, C, D, R, 4-25
where to begin, 4-27
order of removal of boards, 4-9
PARALLEL port, 4-18
ping command, 4-19
power output of channel A, 4-37
power output of channel B, 4-37
power output of channel C, 4-37
power output of channel D, 4-37
power up, 4-6
power supply check, 4-7
rear panel, 4-17
rear-panel USB, 4-17
receiver outputs, 4-41
Index-14
RPG, 4-12
RS-232 port, 4-18
SERIAL port, 4-18
source group
single vs. broadband, 4-29
speaker, 4-12
trace A, 4-25
trace B, 4-25
trace C, 4-25
trace D, 4-25
trace R, 4-25
typical power output
Port 1, 4-37
Port 2, 4-37
Port 3, 4-37
Port 4, 4-37
using controllers to system
troubleshoot, 4-19
using error terms, 8-3
using the extender board, 4-8
VGA port, 4-18
where to begin, 4-4
U
uncertainty
measurement, 3-20
upgrade
20 GHz frequency range, Option F20,
2-5
analyzer, 2-6
configurable test set, Option 014, 2-4
extended power range, Option 1E1,
2-5
firmware
downloading from the internet, 8-18
frequency offset mode, Option 080,
2-4
how to order, 2-3, 2-6
second source, Option S02, 2-5
source attenuator, Option 1E1, 2-5
time domain, Option 010, 2-4
upgrade kits
part numbers, 6-49
USB
accessories
part numbers, 6-49
port
front panel connector, 5-27
rear panel connector, 5-28
rear panel
troubleshooting, 4-17
USB board
troubleshooting, 4-12
USB connector board
removal and replacement
illustrated, 7-11
procedure, 7-12
USB hub
operation, 5-29
utility
option enable
accessing, 8-14
dialog box, 8-14
V
VCO (voltage-controlled oscillator)
defined, 5-6
ventilation requirements, 1-3
verification
ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-8
kits, 2-8, 3-6
substitution, 3-23
non-ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994, 3-9
of operating environment, 3-4
of operating specifications, 3-4
system, 3-1, 3-6, 3-19
dialog box, 3-23
example of results, 3-26, 3-27
failure flowchart, 3-25
failure of, 3-25
getting ready, 3-4
interpreting results, 3-26
performing, 3-22
procedure, 3-23
what it verifies, 3-19
vertical motherboard
illustration, 6-16, 6-17
part number, 6-16
removal and replacement, 7-18
VGA port
rear panel connector, 5-29
troubleshooting, 4-18
W
warm up
analyzer, 3-4
warning, 1-3
warnings
for servicing, 1-4
warranty
service
one-year return to Agilent, 2-10
standard, 2-10
Windows, 2-7
Service Guide N5230-90025